You are on page 1of 189

Huawei LTE Engineering Guide for Operator X

Huawei eRAN6
Huawei sRAN7/sRAN8
Huawei BSS14
Huawei RAN 14
3Gpp Rel.8 and above

Huawei Technologies

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 1 of 189


This page is left blank

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 2 of 189


Table of Contents
1 Cell Selection........................................................................................................................19
1.1 Cell Selection Criteria............................................................................................................19
1.1.1 Initial cell Selection.......................................................................................................................19
1.1.2 USIM information cell selection...................................................................................................19
1.1.3 RRC Connected mode to idle mode cell selection........................................................................19
1.1.4 Cell selection conditions................................................................................................................19
1.1.5 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)..........................................................................................................20
1.2 Huawei Parameters................................................................................................................20
1.2.1 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.........................................................................................................20
1.2.2 Specific parameters for the redirection..........................................................................................21
1.3 Network Current Parameter Values (Cell Selection)..............................................................22
1.3.1 RF conditions (“S” criteria) parameters........................................................................................22
1.3.2 Other related parameters................................................................................................................23

2 Cell Reselection....................................................................................................................25
2.1 Measurement Start Criteria....................................................................................................25
2.1.1 Intra-frequency Measurement.......................................................................................................25
2.1.1.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria).............................................................................................25
2.1.1.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................26
2.1.2 Inter-frequency Measurement........................................................................................................26
2.1.2.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria).............................................................................................26
2.1.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................27
2.1.3 Inter-RAT Measurement...............................................................................................................28
2.1.3.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria).............................................................................................28
2.1.3.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................28
2.2 Measurement Start Criteria Current Network Values............................................................29
2.3 Cell Reselection Criterion......................................................................................................30
2.3.1 Priorities........................................................................................................................................30
2.3.2 Cell reselection and mobility.........................................................................................................32
2.3.2.1 Mobility type detection.....................................................................................................32
2.3.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................33
2.3.2.3 Mobility criterion (scaling rules) for EUTRAN...............................................................33
2.3.2.3.1 Hysteresis.....................................................................................................................................34
2.3.2.3.2 Evaluation Time...........................................................................................................................34

2.3.2.4 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................34


2.3.2.5 Mobility criterion (scaling rules) for GERAN and UTRAN............................................35
2.3.2.6 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................35

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 3 of 189


2.3.2.7 Network Current Parameter Values (Cell Reselection - Mobility)..................................36
2.3.2.7.1 EUTRAN reselection parameter details.......................................................................................36
2.3.2.7.2 EUTRAN reselection current network value................................................................................36
2.3.2.7.3 GERAN reselection parameter details..........................................................................................38
2.3.2.7.4 GERAN reselection current network value..................................................................................38
2.3.2.7.5 UTRAN reselection parameter details..........................................................................................38
2.3.2.7.6 UTRAN reselection current network value..................................................................................38

2.3.3 Other reselection parameters.........................................................................................................39


2.3.4 Ranking (“R” criteria)...................................................................................................................39
2.3.4.1 Cell reselection ranking criteria (Intra-freq. and equal priority for inter-freq.)................39
2.3.4.1.1 Criteria.........................................................................................................................................39
2.3.4.1.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters........................................................................................................40
2.3.4.1.3 Huawei Current Parameter Values...............................................................................................40

2.3.4.2 Cell reselection ranking criteria (Inter-RAT and different priority for inter-frequency). 41
2.3.4.2.1 Criteria.........................................................................................................................................41
2.3.4.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters........................................................................................................44
2.3.4.2.3 Huawei Ranking Current Parameter Values.................................................................................46

2.3.4.3 Reselection Ranking parameter details.............................................................................48


2.4 Reselection Example..............................................................................................................49
2.5 Cell Reselection Summary (Rel. 8)........................................................................................52
2.5.1 L800 and L1800 layers..................................................................................................................52
2.5.2 L1800 layer only............................................................................................................................56
2.5.3 Intra-frequency reselection............................................................................................................58
2.5.4 Inter-frequency reselection............................................................................................................59

3 GSM/UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection..............................................................................60


3.1 GSM to LTE Cell Reselection...............................................................................................60
3.1.1 Cell Reselection feature configuration and activation...................................................................60
3.1.1.1 Priority Network Configuration........................................................................................60
3.1.1.2 Activation.........................................................................................................................60
3.1.1.3 Neigbour definition...........................................................................................................60
3.1.2 Triggering Conditions...................................................................................................................62
3.1.2.1 GERAN priority is lower than EUTRAN priority (GERANPRI < EUTRANPRI).........62
3.1.2.2 EUTRAN priority is lower than GERAN priority (GERANPRI > EUTRANPRI).........62
3.1.2.3 Network Current Parameter Values (GSM-LTE Cell Reselection).................................63
3.1.2.4 Other reselection parameters............................................................................................64
3.1.2.5 GSM-LTE reselection Parameter details..........................................................................64
3.1.3 Fast return to LTE (Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release).................................................65
3.1.3.1 Feature activation..............................................................................................................65
3.2 UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection.............................................................................................66

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 4 of 189


3.2.1 Cell Reselection feature configuration and activation...................................................................66
3.2.1.1 Priority Network Configuration........................................................................................66
3.2.1.2 Neigbour definition...........................................................................................................66
3.2.2 Measurement criterion...................................................................................................................66
3.2.2.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria).............................................................................................66
3.2.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................67
3.2.2.3 Huawei current network Parameters.................................................................................67
3.2.2.4 Parameter details...............................................................................................................68
3.2.3 Triggering Conditions...................................................................................................................68
3.2.3.1 UTRAN priority is lower than EUTRAN priority (UTRANPRI < EUTRANPRI).........68
3.2.3.2 EUTRAN priority is lower than UTRAN priority (UTRANPRI > EUTRANPRI).........68
3.2.3.3 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters.............................................................................................69
3.2.3.4 Huawei current network Parameters.................................................................................69
3.2.3.5 Parameter details...............................................................................................................70
3.2.3.6 Other parameters to consider............................................................................................70
3.2.4 Fast return to LTE (Fast LTE Reselection at 3G CS call release).................................................70
3.2.4.1 Feature Principle...............................................................................................................70
3.2.4.2 Feature Activation............................................................................................................72
3.2.4.2.1 Priorities.......................................................................................................................................72
3.2.4.2.2 Neighbour link definition.............................................................................................................72
3.2.4.2.3 Feature activation.........................................................................................................................72
3.2.4.2.4 Current network setting................................................................................................................72
3.2.4.2.5 Parameter details..........................................................................................................................72

4 Redirection............................................................................................................................74
5 CS Fallback............................................................................................................................75
5.1 Introduction...........................................................................................................................75
5.2 CSFB Mechanisms................................................................................................................75
5.2.1 Towards UTRAN mechanisms......................................................................................................75
5.2.2 Towards GERAN mechanisms......................................................................................................76
5.3 CSFB Basics..........................................................................................................................76
5.4 CSFB Triggering Phase.........................................................................................................77
5.4.1 Description....................................................................................................................................77
5.4.2 CSFB Triggering Parameters........................................................................................................78
5.5 CSFB Measurement Phase.....................................................................................................79
5.5.1 Description....................................................................................................................................79
5.5.2 3Gpp vs Huawei parameters..........................................................................................................80
5.5.3 Current network parameters..........................................................................................................81
5.6 CSFB Decision Phase............................................................................................................82
5.6.1 Description....................................................................................................................................82

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 5 of 189


5.7 CSFB Execution Phase..........................................................................................................82
5.7.1 Description....................................................................................................................................82
5.7.1.1 Execution towards a GERAN cell....................................................................................83
5.7.1.2 Execution towards a GERAN cell....................................................................................83
5.7.2 Parameters.....................................................................................................................................84
5.8 Other parameters....................................................................................................................85
5.8.1 CSFB Huawei other parameters....................................................................................................85
5.8.2 Current Network Huawei other parameters...................................................................................85
5.9 Parameter details....................................................................................................................87
6 Handover...............................................................................................................................88
6.1 Technical Overview and Basic Concepts...............................................................................88
6.1.1 Handover overview (mobility generalities)...................................................................................88
6.1.2 Achitecture summary for mobility in EUTRAN...........................................................................89
6.1.3 Measurement for a Handover........................................................................................................89
6.1.3.1 Measurement Objects.......................................................................................................89
6.1.3.1.1 Target System..............................................................................................................................90
6.1.3.1.2 Target Frequency.........................................................................................................................90
6.1.3.1.3 Measurement Bandwidth and Frequency specific Offset..............................................................90
6.1.3.1.4 Target Cell...................................................................................................................................91

6.1.3.2 Reporting Configuration...................................................................................................91


6.1.3.2.1 Event Triggered Reporting...........................................................................................................91
6.1.3.2.2 Event Triggered Periodical Reporting..........................................................................................92
6.1.3.2.3 Hysteresis and Time-to-Trigger....................................................................................................92
6.1.3.2.4 Triggering Quantity and Reporting Quantity................................................................................93

6.1.3.3 Other parameters...............................................................................................................93


6.1.3.3.1 Filtering........................................................................................................................................93
6.1.3.3.2 Measurement Gap........................................................................................................................95
6.1.3.3.3 Cell Individual Offset (CIO)........................................................................................................96

6.1.4 Decision on a Handover................................................................................................................96


6.1.5 Execution of a Handover...............................................................................................................97
6.1.5.1 X2/S1 Adaptation for a Handover....................................................................................97
6.1.5.2 Data Forwarding...............................................................................................................98
6.1.5.3 RRC Connection Re-Establishment After a Handover Failure........................................99
6.1.6 Neighbor Relationship Management...........................................................................................100
6.1.7 UE Capability Configuration.......................................................................................................101
6.1.8 Redirection..................................................................................................................................101
6.1.8.1 Triggering Mechanism....................................................................................................101
6.1.8.2 Flash Redirection............................................................................................................102
6.1.8.3 Blind Redirection without Neighbouring cells defined..................................................103

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 6 of 189


6.1.9 Blind Handovers..........................................................................................................................103
6.1.9.1 Description......................................................................................................................103
6.1.9.2 Blind handover Parameters.............................................................................................107
6.1.9.3 Blind handover parameter details...................................................................................108
6.2 Inter-RAT Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution.............................................108
6.2.1 Measurement starting/stopping Phase.........................................................................................108
6.2.1.1 Coverage-based handover...............................................................................................108
6.2.1.1.1 Inter-RAT measurements triggered by event A2........................................................................109
6.2.1.1.2 Inter-RAT event A2 target-based setting....................................................................................111
6.2.1.1.3 Inter-RAT measuerements stopped by event A1........................................................................112
6.2.1.1.4 Blind-Handover triggered by event A2......................................................................................114

6.2.1.2 Load-based handover......................................................................................................115


6.2.1.3 Service-based handover..................................................................................................115
6.2.1.4 Uplink Quality based handover......................................................................................115
6.2.1.5 Distance based handover................................................................................................115
6.2.2 Measurement phase.....................................................................................................................115
6.2.2.1 Measurement configuration............................................................................................115
6.2.2.1.1 Inter-RAT measurement object..................................................................................................115
6.2.2.1.2 Measurement report configuration.............................................................................................116
6.2.2.1.3 Measurement quantities and filtering configuration...................................................................117
6.2.2.1.4 Measurement GAP configuration...............................................................................................118

6.2.2.2 Measurement priorities...................................................................................................118


6.2.2.3 Inter-RAT HO triggering................................................................................................118
6.2.2.3.1 Event B1 triggering....................................................................................................................118
6.2.2.3.2 Event B2 triggering....................................................................................................................123

6.2.3 Decision phase.............................................................................................................................123


6.2.4 Execution phase...........................................................................................................................124
6.2.4.1 Inter-RAT handover policy selection.............................................................................124
6.2.4.2 Retry and penalty............................................................................................................125
6.3 Inter-frequency (LTE800-LTE1800) Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution......126
6.3.1 Measurement starting/stopping Phase.........................................................................................126
6.3.1.1 Coverage-based handover...............................................................................................126
6.3.1.1.1 Inter-frequency measurements triggered by event A2................................................................127
6.3.1.1.2 Inter-frequency event A2 target-based setting............................................................................129
6.3.1.1.3 Inter-frequency measuerements stopped by event A1................................................................129
6.3.1.1.4 Blind-Handover triggered by event A2......................................................................................132

6.3.1.2 Load-based handover......................................................................................................132


6.3.1.3 Service-based handover..................................................................................................132
6.3.1.4 Uplink Quality based handover......................................................................................132
6.3.1.5 Distance based handover................................................................................................132

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 7 of 189


6.3.2 Measurement phase.....................................................................................................................132
6.3.2.1 Measurement configuration............................................................................................133
6.3.2.1.1 Measurement GAP configuration...............................................................................................134

6.3.2.2 Inter-frequency HO triggering........................................................................................134


6.3.2.2.1 Event A3 triggering....................................................................................................................135
6.3.2.2.2 Event A4 triggering....................................................................................................................136
6.3.2.2.3 Event A5 triggering....................................................................................................................139

6.3.3 Decision phase.............................................................................................................................139


6.3.4 Execution phase...........................................................................................................................139
6.4 Intra-frequency Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution.....................................139
6.4.1 Measurement phase.....................................................................................................................140
6.4.1.1 Measurement configuration............................................................................................140
6.4.1.2 Event A3.........................................................................................................................141
6.4.2 Decision phase.............................................................................................................................144
6.4.3 Execution phase...........................................................................................................................144
6.4.3.1 Execution policy.............................................................................................................144
6.4.3.2 Retry and Penalty............................................................................................................145

7 SON features.......................................................................................................................146
7.1 ANR146
7.1.1 General overview.........................................................................................................................146
7.1.1.1 Feature overview............................................................................................................146
7.1.1.2 Concept...........................................................................................................................146
7.1.1.2.1 Neighbour Cell List concept (NCL)...........................................................................................146
7.1.1.2.2 Neighbour Relation Table concept (NRT)..................................................................................146
7.1.1.2.3 Blacklists concept.......................................................................................................................147
7.1.1.2.4 Whitelists concept......................................................................................................................147

7.1.2 Intra-RAT ANR...........................................................................................................................147


7.1.2.1 Activation.......................................................................................................................147
7.1.2.2 Detecting missing neighbours by event triggered..........................................................148
7.1.2.2.1 Procedure description.................................................................................................................149

7.1.2.3 Detecting missing neighbours by using UE history information....................................150


7.1.2.3.1 Procedure description.................................................................................................................150

7.1.2.4 Automatic maintenance of NCL’s and NRT’s...............................................................150


7.1.2.4.1 Automatic Maintenance of NCL’s..............................................................................................152
7.1.2.4.2 Automatic Maintenance of NRT’s..............................................................................................153

7.1.3 Inter-RAT ANR...........................................................................................................................154


7.1.4 FAST ANR..................................................................................................................................154
7.2 PCI Conflict detection/optimization.....................................................................................154
7.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................154
7.2.2 PCI Conflict Detection................................................................................................................155

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 8 of 189


7.2.2.1 PCI Conflict Types.........................................................................................................155
7.2.2.2 PCI Collision..................................................................................................................155
7.2.2.3 PCI Confusion................................................................................................................155
7.2.2.3.1 PCI Confusion when the Detected Cell Is a Configured Neighboring Cell.................................156
7.2.2.3.2 PCI Confusion when the Detected Cell Is Not a Configured Neighboring Cell..........................156

7.2.2.4 PCI Conflict Detection Methods....................................................................................157


7.2.3 PCI Self Optimization.................................................................................................................158
7.2.3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................158
7.2.3.2 First-Order Neighboring Cell.........................................................................................158
7.2.3.3 Second-Order Neighboring Cell.....................................................................................158
7.2.4 PCI Re-assignment......................................................................................................................158
7.2.5 Parameters...................................................................................................................................159
7.2.6 Parameter details.........................................................................................................................159
7.2.7 Parameter current network values...............................................................................................159

8 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC)................................................................160


8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................160
8.2 Principles.............................................................................................................................160
8.2.1 CEU/CCU Identification.............................................................................................................161
8.2.1.1 Principles........................................................................................................................161
8.2.1.2 ICIC Event A3 and Event A6.........................................................................................161
8.2.2 Edge Band Mode Assignment.....................................................................................................162
8.2.3 Edge Band Adjustment................................................................................................................163
8.3 Parameters...........................................................................................................................164
8.4 Parameter details..................................................................................................................166
8.5 Downlink Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (DL ICIC)..................................................166
8.5.1 Static DL ICIC.............................................................................................................................166
8.5.2 Dynamic DL ICIC.......................................................................................................................166
8.5.3 Parameters...................................................................................................................................167
8.5.4 Parameter details.........................................................................................................................168
8.6 Uplink Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (UL ICIC)......................................................168
The preceding features address only frequency-domain UL ICIC.............................................168
8.6.1 Static UL ICIC.............................................................................................................................168
8.6.2 Dynamic UL ICIC.......................................................................................................................168
8.6.3 Parameters...................................................................................................................................169
8.6.4 Parameter details.........................................................................................................................169

9 Uplink Coordinated Multi Points (UL CoMP).............................................................170


9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................170
9.2 Scenarios..............................................................................................................................170
9.2.1 Scenario 1....................................................................................................................................170

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 9 of 189


9.2.2 Scenario 2....................................................................................................................................170
9.3 Benefits................................................................................................................................171
9.3.1 Performance Gains......................................................................................................................171
9.3.2 Capacity Gains.............................................................................................................................171
9.4 Basic UL CoMP Process......................................................................................................172
9.5 Selecting CoMP UEs and Coordinating Cells......................................................................172
9.5.1 Selecting a CoMP UE..................................................................................................................172
9.5.2 Selecting a Type-1 CoMP UE and a Coordinating Cell..............................................................173
9.5.3 Selecting a Type-2 CoMP UE and a Coordinating Cell..............................................................174
9.6 Using Antennas of Multiple Cells for Joint Reception.........................................................174
9.7 Parameters...........................................................................................................................174
9.7.1 Parameters...................................................................................................................................174
9.7.2 Parameters current values............................................................................................................174

10 Appendices.............................................................................................................176
10.1 Appendix 1: Cell Selection and Cell Reselection........................................................176
10.1.1 Cell Selection and Cell Reselection states and procedures....................................................176
10.1.2 System Information Block.....................................................................................................177
10.1.2.1 System information Block 1.........................................................................................177
10.1.2.2 System information Block 3.........................................................................................178
10.1.2.3 System information Block 4.........................................................................................179
10.1.2.4 System information Block 5.........................................................................................180
10.1.2.5 System information Block 6.........................................................................................181
10.1.2.6 System information Block 7.........................................................................................182

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 10 of 189


List of Figures

Figure 1-1: UE Capability.............................................................................................................................................22


Figure 2-1: Reselection example..................................................................................................................................49
Figure 2-2: Reselection example..................................................................................................................................50
Figure 2-3: Reselection example..................................................................................................................................51
Figure 2-4: L800 and L1800 layers non-colocated.......................................................................................................52
Figure 2-5: L800 and L1800 layers colocated..............................................................................................................53
Figure 2-6: L800 layer non-colocated...........................................................................................................................54
Figure 2-7: L800 layer colocated..................................................................................................................................55
Figure 2-8: L1800 layers non-colocated.......................................................................................................................56
Figure 2-9: L1800 layers colocated..............................................................................................................................57
Figure 2-10: L800 and L1800 intra-frequency.............................................................................................................58
Figure 2-11: L800 and L1800 inter-frequency.............................................................................................................59
Figure 3-1: Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release - message flow.....................................................................65
Figure 5-1: CSFB - Basic Process................................................................................................................................77
Figure 5-2: CSFB Triggering phase - selecting frequencies to measure or selecting a target cell..............................78
Figure 5-3: CSFB - Event B1........................................................................................................................................80
Figure 5-4: CSFB Execution phase - Procedure for executing CSFB to GERAN.......................................................83
Figure 5-5: CSFB Execution phase - Procedure for executing CSFB to UTRAN.......................................................84
Figure 6-1: Handover – EUTRAN mobility global picture..........................................................................................88
Figure 6-2: Handover – architecture summary for mobility in EUTRAN....................................................................89
Figure 6-3: Handover – L3 Filtering.............................................................................................................................93
Figure 6-4: Handover – Measurement GAP.................................................................................................................96
Figure 6-5: Handover – X2/S1 Adaptation – Architecture view..................................................................................98
Figure 6-6: Successful RRC connection re-establishment procedure...........................................................................99
Figure 6-7: Failed RRC connection re-establishment procedure................................................................................100
Figure 6-8: Handover – Blind handover selection procedure.....................................................................................105
Figure 6-9: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement - Event A2....................................................................................110
Figure 6-10: Inter-RAT measurement - Event A1.....................................................................................................113
Figure 6-11: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 4.................................................................................113
Figure 6-12: Inter-RAT measurement - Event B1......................................................................................................120
Figure 6-13: HO policy selection................................................................................................................................125
Figure 6-14: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement - Event A2..................................................................................128
Figure 6-15: Inter-frequency measurement - Event A1..............................................................................................131
Figure 6-16: Handover – Event A4 triggering mechanism.........................................................................................137
Figure 6-17: Handover – Event A3 mechanism.........................................................................................................142
Figure 7-1: SON - ANR classification........................................................................................................................146
Figure 7-2: SON - ANR – Event triggered Procedure (UE measurement).................................................................149
Figure 7-3: SON - ANR – UE history information Procedure...................................................................................150
Figure 7-4: SON – PCI Collision................................................................................................................................155
Figure 7-5: SON – PCI Confusion (configured neighbour)........................................................................................156
Figure 7-6: SON – PCI Confusion (not configured neighbour).................................................................................157
Figure 8-1: ICIC – Principle - Techniques.................................................................................................................160
Figure 8-2: ICIC – Edge Band Modes for tri-sector site (eNodeB)............................................................................163
Figure 8-3: ICIC – Edge Band Adjustment example..................................................................................................164
Figure 9-1: UL CoMP – Scenario 1............................................................................................................................170
Figure 9-2: UL CoMP – Scenario 2............................................................................................................................171
Figure 9-3: UL-CoMP - Basic Process.......................................................................................................................172
Figure 9-4: UL CoMP – Tri-sector site RSRP............................................................................................................173
Figure 10-1: 3Gpp TS 36.304 RRC Idle cell selection and reselection states and procedures...................................176

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 11 of 189


This page is left blank

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 12 of 189


List of Tables

Table 1-1: 3Gpp “S” Criteria........................................................................................................................................20


Table 1-2: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters...................................................................................................................20
Table 1-3: “S” criteria current values...........................................................................................................................23
Table 1-4: Other Huawei related parameters................................................................................................................24
Table 2-1: 3Gpp criteria................................................................................................................................................26
Table 2-2: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters (intra – frequency)....................................................................................26
Table 2-3: 3Gpp criteria................................................................................................................................................27
Table 2-4: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters (inter – frequency)....................................................................................27
Table 2-5: 3Gpp “S” criteria.........................................................................................................................................28
Table 2-6:“S” criteria Huawei Parameters (inter – RAT).............................................................................................29
Table 2-7: Measurement triggering current Huawei parameter values........................................................................30
Table 2-8: Current Network Priorities..........................................................................................................................31
Table 2-9: Priorities broadcast SIB...............................................................................................................................31
Table 2-10: Timer values..............................................................................................................................................32
Table 2-11: 3Gpp Mobility state parameters................................................................................................................33
Table 2-12: Mobility State 3Gpp vs Huawei parameters..............................................................................................33
Table 2-13: 3Gpp Scaling rules for Qhyst parameters (EUTRAN).................................................................................34
Table 2-14: 3Gpp Scaling rules for Treselection parameters (EUTRAN)...........................................................................34
Table 2-15: Scaling rules for Qhyst Huawei parameters (EUTRAN).............................................................................34
Table 2-16: Scaling rules for Treselection Huawei parameters (EUTRAN intra-frequency).............................................35
Table 2-17: Scaling rules for Treselection Huawei parameters (EUTRAN inter-frequency).............................................35
Table 2-18: 3Gpp Scaling rules for TreselectionGERA parameters (GERAN).......................................................................35
Table 2-19: 3Gpp Scaling rules for TreselectionUTRA parameters (UTRAN).......................................................................35
Table 2-20: Scaling rules for TreselectionGERA Huawei parameters (GERAN)...................................................................36
Table 2-21: Scaling rules for TreselectionUTRA Huawei parameters (UTRAN)...................................................................36
Table 2-22: Reselection EUTRAN current Huawei parameter values.........................................................................37
Table 2-23: Reselection GERAN current Huawei parameter values............................................................................38
Table 2-24: Reselection UTRAN current Huawei parameter values............................................................................38
Table 2-25: Other Huawei reselection parameters........................................................................................................39
Table 2-26: “R” criteria offset Huawei parameters (EUTRAN)..................................................................................40
Table 2-27: “R” criteria offset parameter current values (EUTRAN)..........................................................................41
Table 2-28: 3Gpp Ranking Parameters.........................................................................................................................43
Table 2-29: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking GERAN Parameters........................................................................................44
Table 2-30: Other Huawei Ranking GERAN Parameters............................................................................................44
Table 2-31: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking UTRAN Parameters........................................................................................44
Table 2-32: Other Huawei Ranking UTRAN Parameters............................................................................................45
Table 2-33: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking EUTRAN Parameters......................................................................................45
Table 2-34: Other Huawei Ranking EUTRAN (inter-frequency) Parameters..............................................................45
Table 2-35: Ranking parameter current value (GERAN).............................................................................................46
Table 2-36: Ranking parameter current value (UTRAN, U2100)................................................................................46
Table 2-37: Ranking parameter current value (UTRAN, U900)..................................................................................47
Table 2-38: Ranking parameter current value (EUTRAN, L800)................................................................................47
Table 2-39: Ranking parameter current value (EUTRAN, L1800)..............................................................................48
Table 3-1: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection Huawei Priority Parameters.......................................................................60
Table 3-2: : GSM to LTE Cell Reselection Huawei Activation Parameters................................................................60
Table 3-3: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection - neighbours definition (GLTENCELL)....................................................61
Table 3-4: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection - neighbours definition (GEXTLTECELL)...............................................61
Table 3-5: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection – current parameter values.........................................................................64
Table 3-6: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection – other parameters......................................................................................64
Table 3-7: Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release - neighbours definition (GLTENCELL)...............................65

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 13 of 189


Table 3-8: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - Huawei Priority Parameters..................................................................66
Table 3-9: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - 3Gpp criteria..........................................................................................67
Table 3-10: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - “S” criteria Huawei Parameters..........................................................67
Table 3-11: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - “S” criteria Huawei Parameters curent network values......................67
Table 3-12: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - 3Gpp criteria.......................................................................................69
Table 3-13: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - triggering criteria Huawei Parameters................................................69
Table 3-14: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - triggering criterion Huawei Parameters curent network values.........70
Table 3-15: : UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection – Other parameters..............................................................................70
Table 3-16: Fast Return to LTE – Absolute Priorities..................................................................................................72
Table 3-17: Fast Return to LTE – NB frequenccy parameters.....................................................................................72
Table 5-1: CSFB Towards UTRAN Mechanisms........................................................................................................75
Table 5-2: CSFB Towards GERAN Mechanisms........................................................................................................76
Table 5-3: CSFB triggering phase - parameters...........................................................................................................78
Table 5-4: CSFB measurement phase - 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters..........................................................................81
Table 5-5: CSFB execution phase - parameters............................................................................................................84
Table 5-6: CSFB – Other parameters............................................................................................................................85
Table 5-7: CSFB – Other parameters values................................................................................................................86
Table 6-1: Handover – Target Frequency Priorities parameters...................................................................................90
Table 6-2: Handover – Measurement bandwidth and offset parameters......................................................................91
Table 6-3: Handover – L3 Filtering parameters...........................................................................................................94
Table 6-4: Handover – L3 Filtering parameters values................................................................................................95
Table 6-5: Handover – Measurement Gap Pattern parameter......................................................................................96
Table 6-6: Handover – Neighbor management priority..............................................................................................101
Table 6-7: Handover – blind handover parameters.....................................................................................................107
Table 6-8: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 1....................................................................................108
Table 6-9: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 2....................................................................................110
Table 6-10: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 2 current values..........................................................111
Table 6-11: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 3..................................................................................112
Table 6-12: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 4 current values..........................................................114
Table 6-13: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 5..................................................................................115
Table 6-14: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 5 values.......................................................................116
Table 6-15: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 6..................................................................................116
Table 6-16: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 6 values.......................................................................117
Table 6-17: Handover – categorized event B1 quantities and parameter thresholds..................................................120
Table 6-18: Handover – Event B1 parameters............................................................................................................121
Table 6-19: Handover – Event B1 parameters values................................................................................................122
Table 6-20: Handover – event B2 threshold parameters............................................................................................123
Table 6-21: Handover – event B2 threshold parameters values.................................................................................123
Table 6-22: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 1..........................................................................126
Table 6-23: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 2..........................................................................128
Table 6-24: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 2 values...............................................................129
Table 6-25: Handover – inter-frequency event A1 parameters..................................................................................131
Table 6-26: Handover – inter-frequency event A1 parameters values.......................................................................132
Table 6-27: Handover – inter-frequency measurement config parameters................................................................133
Table 6-28: Handover – inter-frequency measurement config parameters values.....................................................134
Table 6-29: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering parameters 1..............................................................135
Table 6-30: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering parameters 1 values...................................................135
Table 6-31: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering event A3 specific parameters....................................135
Table 6-32: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering event A3 specific parameters values.........................136
Table 6-33: Handover – inter-frequency event A4 parameters..................................................................................138
Table 6-34: Handover – inter-frequency event A4 parameters values.......................................................................138
Table 6-35: Handover – intra-frequency parameter 1.................................................................................................140
Table 6-36: Handover – intra-frequency event A3 parameters values.......................................................................143
Table 6-37: Handover – intra-frequency event A3 parameters values.......................................................................144
Table 7-1: SON - ANR – Activation parameter.........................................................................................................148
Table 7-2: SON - ANR – NCL and NRT automatic maintenace parameters.............................................................151

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 14 of 189


Table 7-3: SON - ANR – NCL parameters.................................................................................................................152
Table 7-4: SON - ANR – NCL parameters.................................................................................................................154
Table 7-5: SON – PCI conflict detection / optimization parameters..........................................................................159
Table 8-1: ICIC - Parameters......................................................................................................................................164
Table 8-2: ICIC – Parameters current values..............................................................................................................165
Table 8-3: ICIC – DL ICIC Parameters......................................................................................................................167
Table 8-4: ICIC – DL ICIC Parameters network current value..................................................................................167
Table 8-5: ICIC – UL ICIC Parameters......................................................................................................................169
Table 8-6: ICIC – UL ICIC Parameters network current value..................................................................................169
Table 9-1: UL-CoMP - parameter...............................................................................................................................174
Table 9-2: UL-CoMP – parameter values...................................................................................................................174
Table 10-1: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 1 description......................................................................177
Table 10-2: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 3 description......................................................................179
Table 10-3: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 4 description......................................................................180
Table 10-4: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 5 description......................................................................181
Table 10-5: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 6 description......................................................................182
Table 10-6: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 7 description......................................................................183

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 15 of 189


This page is left blank

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 16 of 189


Revision History

Version Release Date Updated by Update Description


1.0 1.0 21/02/2014 Dominique Cooreman Initial version
1.0 2.0 26/02/2014 Dominique Cooreman Add PCI Conflict
detection/optimization
1.0 3.0 04/03/2014 Dominique Cooreman Add ICIC Inter-Cell Interference
Coordination

Note:
at the time of releasing this document (initial version), the Mobistar network was running eRAN3, BSS/RAN14, and
sRAN7.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 17 of 189


This page is left blank

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 18 of 189


1 Cell Selection

1.1 Cell Selection Criteria

There are three types of cell selection:

- initial cell selection


- cell selection based on what is recorded in the USIM
- cell selection after leaving the RRC connected mode, so move back to idle mode

The cell selection is specified by the 3Gpp TS 36.304.

1.1.1 Initial cell Selection

Before the initial cell selection, a PLMN selection is needed.


The initial cell selection is made by the UE, it is simply scanning the RF carries for a suitable cell, when the UE is
synchronized with the control channels, the UE will be camping on that cell.

1.1.2 USIM information cell selection


In order to help, or speed-up the cell selection, the UE can store information in the USIM and re-use this information
later when the UE is switch on. For example the last used RF carrier when the UE is switch off. If this information
cannot be used, or is irrelevant (i.e. the UE is in another location), the initial cell selection procedure will be used
instead.

1.1.3 RRC Connected mode to idle mode cell selection


On transition from RRC_CONNECTED to RRC_IDLE, UE shall attempt to camp on a suitable cell according to
redirectedCarrierInfo, if included in the RRCConnectionRelease message. If the UE cannot find a suitable cell, the
UE is allowed to camp on any suitable cell of the indicated RAT. If the RRCConnectionRelease message does not
contain the redirectedCarrierInfo UE shall attempt to select a suitable cell on an EUTRAN carrier. If no suitable cell
is found according to the above, the UE shall perform a cell selection starting with Stored Information Cell Selection
procedure in order to find a suitable cell to camp on.
When returning to RRC_IDLE after UE moved to RRC_CONNECTED state from camped on any cell state, UE
shall attempt to camp on an acceptable cell according to redirectedCarrierInfo, if included in the
RRCConnectionRelease message. If the UE cannot find an acceptable cell, the UE is allowed to camp on any
acceptable cell of the indicated RAT. If the RRCConnectionRelease message does not contain redirectedCarrierInfo
UE shall attempt to select an acceptable cell on an EUTRAN carrier. If no acceptable cell is found according to the
above, the UE shall continue to search for an acceptable cell of any PLMN in state any cell selection.

1.1.4 Cell selection conditions


The following cells cannot be selected:

- barred cells
- it must belongs to the registered PLMN
- not allowed TA (Tracking area)
- do not satisfies with the RF conditions

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 19 of 189


1.1.5 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)
These RF criterion are defined in the 3Gpp specifications ( since Rel.9). These conditions are applied for all three
types of cell selection. These parameters are broadcasted on the system information block 1 (SIB1). The SIB1 can
be find in the appendices.

SRxLev > 0
SQual > 0

where:

Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas – (Qrxlevmin + Qrxlevminoffset) – Pcompensation

Squal = Qqualmeas – (Qqualmin + Qqualminoffset)

where:

Table 1-1: 3Gpp “S” Criteria

Parameter Description
Srxlev Cell selection RX level value (dB)
Squal Cell selection quality value (dB)
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell RX level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Qrxlevminoffset Offset to the signalled Qrxlevmin taken into account in the Srxlev evaluation as a result of a
periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN [5]

Qqualminoffset Offset to the signalled Qqualmin taken into account in the Squal evaluation as a result of a
periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN [5]
Pcompensation max(PEMAX –PPowerClass, 0) (dB)
PEMAX Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell
(dBm) defined as PEMAX in [TS 36.101]
PPowerClass Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as
defined in [TS 36.101]

Note: Squal exists only since Rel.9.

1.2 Huawei Parameters

1.2.1 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 1-2: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level Cellsel
Qqualmin QQualMin Minimum required RX quality level Cellsel
Qrxlevminoffset QRxLevMinOffset Minimum required RX level offset Cellsel
QQualMinOffsetCfgInd Minimum required RX quality level offset configure indicator Cellsel
Qqualminoffset QQualMinOffset Minimum required RX quality level offset Cellsel
UePowerMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure indicator Cell
PEMAX UePowerMax Minimum required RX level Cell

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 20 of 189


Parameter details:

Huawei Parameter
cell selection details.xlsx

1.2.2 Specific parameters for the redirection

Regarding the third cell selection case, on transition from RRC_CONNECTED to RRC_IDLE, this is also called
“redirection”. In Huawei, there is the possibility to allow HO, redirection, or both.

Redirection is a method of transferring UEs between cells and is a type of handover when "handover" is used as a
generic term. When a handover cannot be performed in an emergency or due to equipment limitations, the eNodeB
sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message, which contains information about a neighboring frequency in
the LTE system or in another RAT system. Using this message, the eNodeB instructs the UE to initiate a random
access procedure towards an inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cell so that the UE can resume its services.

Compared with handovers, redirections do not include a procedure for initiating a handover request towards a
neighboring cell and therefore have lower requirements for equipment capabilities and require less time. The two
methods differ in the way to transfer UEs.

Redirections are triggered if a device in the network or the UE involved does not support inter-frequency or inter-
RAT handovers. If both the network and UE support inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers, handovers are
recommended.

The UTRAN, and GERAN network are often mature, and may not support inter-RAT handovers from the
EUTRAN. In this situation, redirections instead of inter-RAT handovers can be performed on UEs. Therefore,
network capabilities must be collected to determine whether to enable handovers or redirections for UE transfer. To
enable handovers or redirections, turn on the corresponding switch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch
parameter. If both handovers and redirections are enabled, the eNodeB preferentially uses handovers to transfer
UEs.

During an inter-RAT handover, if the eNodeB determines that the UE does not support inter-RAT measurements or
handovers based on the results of a UE capability inquiry procedure, the eNodeB sends an RRC Connection Release
message to the UE to perform a redirection. This message contains information about the target frequency for the
redirection.

The eNodeB determines whether the UE is capable of inter-RAT measurements and handovers in an adaptive
manner, without requiring user configuration.

Figure 1 shows the UE capability inquiry procedure. For details, refer to 3GPP TS 36.331 Release 10.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 21 of 189


Figure 1-1: UE Capability

In the UE Capability Information message reported by the UE, the featureGroupIndicators IE (Information Element)
indicates whether the UE is capable of frequency-specific or RAT-specific measurements and handovers. For details
about this IE, refer to the 3GPP TS 36.331 Release 10.

If an SPID (subscriber profile ID) is configured for a UE in the EPC or the eNodeB is configured with dedicated
frequency priorities, the eNodeB may deliver a dedicated priority in the idleModeMobilityControlInfo IE of the
command for a redirection. For details about the principles and configuration of SPIDs, see Flexible User Steering
Feature Parameter Description (this is not used here but exists). For details about dedicated priority configuration for
UEs in idle mode, see Idle Mode Management Feature Parameter Description.

In an inter-frequency handover, if the UE does not support inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurements, the eNodeB
performs a blind handover or a blind redirection to transfer the UE to a neighboring cell. Please refer to Blind
Handover topic further in this document for details.

The eNodeB supports flash redirections to UTRAN and GERAN. The flash redirection function is controlled by the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.RedirectSwitch parameter. If a switch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.RedirectSwitch parameter
is turned on, the eNodeB includes the system information of the target cell in the redirection command. This enables
the UE to access the target cell sooner because the UE does not need to read the system information. During a flash
redirection procedure, the eNodeB uses the RAN information management (RIM) procedure to acquire system
information of the target cell. To use RIM, ensure that the devices in the core network and target RAN also support
the RIM procedure. For details about RIM, see CS Fallback Feature further in this document. Note that only UEs
compliant with Release 9 and later releases support the flash redirection function.

1.3 Network Current Parameter Values (Cell Selection)

1.3.1 RF conditions (“S” criteria) parameters

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 22 of 189


Table 1-3: “S” criteria current values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -64 (-128 -64 (-128 -64 (-128 -64 (-128
dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
QQualMin Minimum required RX quality -18 (-18 dB) -18 (-18 -18 (-18 -18 (-18
level dB) dB) dB)
QRxLevMinOffset Minimum required RX level 0 (0 dB) 0 (0 dB) 0 (0 dB) 0 (0 dB)
offset
QQualMinOffsetCfgI Minimum required RX quality NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CF NOT_CF
nd level offset configure indicator G G
QQualMinOffset Minimum required RX quality
level offset
UePowerMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CF NOT_CF
configure indicator G G
UePowerMax Max transmit power UE Capable UE Capable UE UE
allowed(dBm) Power Power Capable Capable
Power Power

At the moment, an LTE cell becomes selectable as soon as the RSRP is equal or above -128 dBm. The RSRQ
criteria is only used for UE with Rel.9 or above, UE power is the capable power of the UE (no limitations).

1.3.2 Other related parameters

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 23 of 189


Table 1-4: Other Huawei related parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Table


HoAlgoSwitch Handover Algo switch IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch-1 ENodeBAlgoSwitch
&InterFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&UtranCsfbSwitch-1
&GeranCsfbSwitch-1
&Cdma1xRttCsfbSwitch-0
&UtranServiceHoSwitch-0
&GeranServiceHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdServiceHoSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttServiceHoSwitch-0
&UlQualityInterRATHoSwitch-0
&InterPlmnHoSwitch-0
&UtranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&GeranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&ServiceBasedInterFreqHoSwitch-0
&UlQualityInterFreqHoSwitch-0
HoModeSwitch Handover Mode switch EutranVoipCapSwitch-0 ENodeBAlgoSwitch
&UtranVoipCapSwitch-0
&GeranVoipCapSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttVoipCapSwitch-0
&UtranPsHoSwitch-0
&GeranPsHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdNonOtpimisedHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdOptimisedHoSwitch-0
&GeranNaccSwitch-0
&GeranCcoSwitch-0
&UtranSrvccSwitch-0
&GeranSrvccSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttSrvccSwitch-0
&UtranRedirectSwitch-1
&GeranRedirectSwitch-1
&CdmaHrpdRedirectSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttRedirectSwitch-0
&BlindHoSwitch-0
RedirectSwitch Redirection switch LoadBasedSwitch-0 ENodeBAlgoSwitch
&GeranFlashRedirectSwitch-0
&UranFlashRedirectSwitch-0
RimSwitch RIM switch UTRAN_RIM_SWITCH-0 ENodeBAlgoSwitch
&GERAN_RIM_SWITCH-0

This means that redirection is activated, but not the flash redirection. CSFB is also active (see chapter 5 for CSFB).

Huawei Parameter details:

Huawei Parameter
cell redirection details.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 24 of 189


2 Cell Reselection

This chapter will present the reselection between LTE cells, inclusive multi band reselection. The operator is indeed
using two different carriers L800 and L1800. Mainly two criterion are considerred: priorities and measurements (RF
conditions). Later other technologies will be considered in chapter 3.
Again, as for the cell selection, some additional criterion have been added since Rel. 9.These are relative to RSRQ
and a new search reference level (“SintraSearchP”). When activated, these parameters are all broadcasted on the
System Information Block 3 (SIB3). Please refer to the appendices for the system information block 3 details.

The cell reselection is specified by the 3Gpp TS 36.304 and TS 36.331

2.1 Measurement Start Criteria

Reselection measurement criterion are based on parameters broadcasted by the serving cell (where the UE is
camping on), and not from the neighbours. These measurements start only when necessary to avoid unecessary
signalling and so save UE battery live.

2.1.1 Intra-frequency Measurement

2.1.1.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)

Rel. 8 and before

Srxlev < Sintrasearch

Since Rel. 9

Srxlev < SintrasearchP


or
Squal < SintrasearchQ

where,

Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas – Qrxlevmin – Pcompensation

Squal = Qqualmeas – Qqualmin

When these parameters are not broadcasted, the UE is making measurements continuously, this is a drawback for the
UE battery.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 25 of 189


Table 2-5: 3Gpp criteria

Parameter Description
Sintrasearch This parameter define the RSRP threshold for the serving cell, when the RSRP is below
that threshold, the UE will start measuring neighbour LTE cells within the same
frequency band. If this parameter is not broadcasted, the UE will make measurements
all the time.
SintrasearchP This parameter is replacing Sintrasearch since Rel. 9.
SintrasearchQ This threshold is applicable on RSRQ. It is only present since Rel. 9.
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell Rx level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required Rx level in the cell (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Pcompensation max(PEMAX –PPowerClass, 0) (dB)
PEMAX Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell
(dBm) defined as PEMAX in [TS 36.101]
PPowerClass Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as
defined in [TS 36.101]

2.1.1.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-6: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters (intra – frequency)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SIntraSearchCfgInd Threshold for intra frequency measurements configure CellResel
indicator
Sintrasearch Sintrasearch Threshold for intra frequency measurements CellResel
SintrasearchP Sintrasearch Threshold for intra frequency measurements CellResel
SIntraSearchQ SIntraSearchQ RSRQ Threshold for intra frequency measurements CellResel
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level CellResel
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum intra-frequency reselection required quality level CellResel
configure indicator
Qqualmin QQualMin Minimum required RX quality level CellResel
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure indicator CellResel
PEMAX PMax Max transmit power allowed CellResel

Note: SintrasearchP do not exists in Huawei parameters, it is the same as SIntraSearch.

2.1.2 Inter-frequency Measurement

2.1.2.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)

Rel. 8 and before

Srxlev < Snonintrasearch

Since Rel. 9

Srxlev < SnonintrasearchP


or
Squal < SnonintrasearchQ

where,

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 26 of 189


Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas – Qrxlevmin– Pcompensation

Squal = Qqualmeas – Qqualmin

Inter – frequency measurements are always started when the candidate layer has a higher priority than the serving
cell.

Table 2-7: 3Gpp criteria

Parameter Description
Snonintrasearch This parameter define the RSRP threshold for the serving cell, when the RSRP is below
that threshold, the UE will start measuring neighbour cells. If this parameter is not
broadcasted, the UE will make measurements all the time.
SnonintrasearchP This parameter is replacing Snonintrasearch since Rel. 9.
SnonintrasearchQ This threshold is applicable on RSRQ. It is only present since Rel. 9.
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell Rx level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required Rx level in the cell (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Pcompensation max(PEMAX –PPowerClass, 0) (dB)
PEMAX Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell
(dBm) defined as PEMAX in [TS 36.101]
PPowerClass Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as
defined in [TS 36.101]

2.1.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-8: “S” criteria Huawei Parameters (inter – frequency)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SNonIntraSearchCfgInd Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements configure indicator
Snonintrasearch SNonIntraSearch Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements
SnonintrasearchP SNonIntraSearch Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements
SnonintrasearchQ SNonIntraSearchQ RSRQ Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and CellResel
inter-RAT measurements
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level CellResel
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum intra-frequency reselection required quality CellResel
level configure indicator
Qqualmin QQualMin Minimum required RX quality level CellResel
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure indicator CellResel
PEMAX PMax Max transmit power allowed CellResel

Note: SnonintrasearchP do not exists in Huawei parameters, it is the same as SnonIntraSearch.

2.1.3 Inter-RAT Measurement

2.1.3.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)

Basically the same conditions are applicable than for inter – frequency, and the same parameters are applicable.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 27 of 189


Rel. 8 and before

Srxlev < Snonintrasearch

Since Rel. 9

Srxlev < SnonintrasearchP


or
Squal < SintrasearchQ

where,

Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas – Qrxlevmin– Pcompensation

Squal = Qqualmeas – Qqualmin

Inter – RAT measurements are always started when the candidate layer has a higher priority than the serving cell.

Table 2-9: 3Gpp “S” criteria

Parameter Description
Snonintrasearch This parameter define the RSRP threshold for the serving cell, when the RSRP is below
that threshold, the UE will start measuring neighbour cells. If this parameter is not
broadcasted, the UE will make measurements all the time.
SnonintrasearchP This parameter is replacing Snonintrasearch since Rel. 9.
SnonintrasearchQ This threshold is applicable on RSRQ. It is only present since Rel. 9.
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell Rx level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required Rx level in the cell (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Pcompensation max(PEMAX –PPowerClass, 0) (dB)
PEMAX Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell
(dBm) defined as PEMAX in [TS 36.101]
PPowerClass Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as
defined in [TS 36.101]

2.1.3.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 28 of 189


Table 2-10:“S” criteria Huawei Parameters (inter – RAT)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SNonIntraSearchCfgInd Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements configure indicator
Snonintrasearch SNonIntraSearch Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements
SnonintrasearchP SNonIntraSearch Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and inter- CellResel
RAT measurements
SnonintrasearchQ SNonIntraSearchQ RSRQ Threshold for EUTRAN inter-frequency and CellResel
inter-RAT measurements
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level CellResel
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum intra-frequency reselection required quality CellResel
level configure indicator
Qqualmin QQualMin Minimum required RX quality level CellResel
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure indicator CellResel
PEMAX PMax Max transmit power allowed CellResel

Note: SnonintrasearchP do not exists in Huawei parameters, it is the same as SnonIntraSearch.

2.2 Measurement Start Criteria Current Network Values

The table here below gives the operator current parameter values for the measurement triggering criteria.
Table 2-11: Measurement triggering current Huawei parameter values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -64 (-128 -64 (-128 -64 (-128 -64 (-128
dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum intra-frequency CFG CFG CFG CFG
reselection required quality level
configure indicator
QQualMin Minimum required RX quality level -18 (-18 dB) -18 (-18 dB) -18 (-18 -18 (-18
dB) dB)
SIntraSearchCfgInd Threshold for intra frequency CFG CFG CFG CFG
measurements configure indicator
Sintrasearch Threshold for intra frequency 29 (-70 dBm) 29 (-70 dBm) 29 (-70 29 (-70
measurements dBm) dBm)
SIntraSearchQ RSRQ Threshold for intra frequency 5 (-13 dBm) 5 (-13 dBm) 5 (-13 5 (-13 dBm)
measurements dBm)
SNonIntraSearchCfgInd Threshold for EUTRAN inter- CFG CFG CFG CFG
frequency and inter-RAT
measurements configure indicator
SNonIntraSearch Threshold for EUTRAN inter- 7 (-114dBm) 7 (-114dBm) 7 (- 12 (-104
frequency and inter-RAT 114dBm) dBm)
measurements
SNonIntraSearchQ RSRQ Threshold for EUTRAN 4 (-14 dB) 4 (-14 dB) 4 (-14 dB) 4 (-14 dB)
inter-frequency and inter-RAT
measurements
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG
indicator
PMax Max transmit power allowed (UE Capable (UE Capable (UE (UE
Power) Power) Capable Capable
Power) Power)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 29 of 189


From this table, it can be read that RSRP, RSRQ (Rel. 9 only) are active conditions in order to start measurement of
intra-frequency candidates or inter-frequency and inter-RAT frequency candidates.
The UE transmit power is not set to a specific value, but is left to its capable transmit power (UE class). So its
maximum transmit power is taken into account in the criteria.
For Rel.8 UE, when the RSRP of the serving cell (UE camps on) is below -70dBm but above -114dBm, the UE will
start to scan intra-frequency candidates. In case the RSRP is below -114dBm, the UE will additionally scan inter-
frequency and inter-RAT candidates. Above -70dBm, the measurement will not start. For the L1800 dual layer, this
threshold is set to -104dBm.
For Rel.9 UE, additionally to the RSRP, the RSRQ of the serving cell is taken into account too. As soon as the
RSRQ is below -13dB, the UE will start scanning intra-frequency candidates, when this RSRQ is below -14 dB, the
UE will additionally scan the inter-frequency and inter-RAT candidates.
Note that other criteria are taken into account for the ranking of the candidates, see here below.

2.3 Cell Reselection Criterion

2.3.1 Priorities

As it can be seen in the table here under, The operator is putting the priority on LTE1800. The benefit of this
strategy is that LTE1800 is a 15Mhz bandwidth, while LTE800 is only 10 MHz bandwidth, although some
exceptions can occur. This means that in good radio conditions, the throughput experienced by the users will be
better, or at least the users can share more capacity. When the radio conditions become worst, the user can move to
LTE800, where the radio conditions would be better for that same location, usually a 6 to 10 dB better RSRP could
be expected. The interaction with other technologies will be considered in the next chapter.

Table 2-12: Current Network Priorities

Priority Network Remark


7 Reserved Highest
6 Reserved (LTE2600)
5 LTE1800
4 LTE800
3 Reserved (LTE700)
2 UMTS2100
1 UMTS900
0 GSM900 + DCS1800 Lowest

The priorities, together with other information (parameters to follow), are broadcasted as folowing in the message
“CommonInfo”:

Table 2-13: Priorities broadcast SIB

SIB Technologies
SIB3(cellReselectionInfoCommon Intra-frequency
)
SIB5(multiBandInfoList) Inter-frequency
SIB6(multiBandInfoList) Inter-RAT UMTS
SIB7(commonInfo) Inter-RAT GSM

Notes:
- the RAT priorities must be different, similar priorities between RAT are not supported;
- G1800 is in the same group (list of ARFCN) of G900, if some G1800 neighbours are defined;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 30 of 189


- in order to to interpret G1800 channels and G1900 channels, a parameter called “band indicator”
defines the bands (GSM_dcs1800 and GSM_psc1900).

The UE shall delete priorities provided by dedicated signalling when:

- the UE enters RRC_CONNECTED state; or

- the optional validity time of dedicated priorities (T320) expires; or

- a PLMN selection is performed on request by NAS.

Huawei Priority Parameter:

Network Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


EUTRAN (Intra-freq) CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority CellResel
EUTRAN (Inter-freq) CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority EutranInterNFreq
configure indicator
EUTRAN (Inter-freq) CellReselPriority Inter frequency cell resel priority EutranInterNFreq
UTRAN CellReselPriorityCfgInd Reselection priority configure indicator UtranNFreq
UTRAN CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority UtranNFreq
GERAN CellReselPriorityCfgInd Cell reselection priority configure GeranNfreqGroup
indicator
GERAN CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority GeranNfreqGroup

Note that for GERAN, the priority is made for the whole group of cells, inclusive DCS1800.

Parameter details:

Priorities.xlsx

- The UE shall only perform cell reselection evaluation for EUTRAN frequencies and inter-RAT
frequencies that are given in system information and for which the UE has a priority provided.
- The UE shall not consider any black listed cells as candidate for cell reselection. Blacklists and whitelists
are not introduced here in this document.
- The UE shall inherit the priorities provided by dedicated signalling and the remaining validity time (i.e.,
T320 in EUTRA) if configured, at inter-RAT cell (re)selection.

Note:
there are two different T320, one for the load balancing and one for all the other case. The one considered here is
the second one.

The current value for T320 is:

Table 2-14: Timer values

Timer Value Network


T320 Other 120 min. EUTRA

T320 parameter details:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 31 of 189


T320.xlsx

2.3.2 Cell reselection and mobility


In order to be sure the UE is on the appropiate cell all the time, it is very critical for LTE. Indeed, as the frequency is
shared, when the RSRP of the serving cell starts to decrease, andthe RSRP from a neighbour cell starts to increase, if
the reselection is not made on time, the interference will be such that the reselection won’t be possible anymore.
Therefore, it is quite important to take other factors into account during the reselection, one factor is the UE speed.
The idea is to ease the mobility of fast UE dynamically. The first part is to be able to detect the UE speed.

2.3.2.1 Mobility type detection

There are three different states for the mobility:

 normal mobility;
 medium mobility;
 high mobility.

Some parameters need to be set in order to detect the UE mobility states. They are listed here below;

Table 2-15: 3Gpp Mobility state parameters

Parameter Description
TCRmax Mobility evaluation duration to determine the mobility state
NCR_M Number of cell reselection during TCRmax to enter the medium mobility state
NCR-H Number of cell reselection during TCRmax to enter the high mobility state
TCRmaxHyst Mobility period during which medium or high mobility criteria are not detected in order to
move back to the normal mobility state

These parameters are broadcasted on SIB3.

State detection criteria:


Medium-mobility state criteria:
- If the number of cell reselections during time period TCRmax exceeds NCR_M and not exceeds NCR_H

High-mobility state criteria:


- If the number of cell reselections during time period TCRmax exceeds NCR_H

The UE shall not count consecutive reselections between same two cells into mobility state detection criteria if same
cell is reselected just after one other reselection.

State transitions:
The UE shall:
- if the criteria for High-mobility state is detected:

- the UE enter to High-mobility state.

- else if the criteria for Medium-mobility state is detected:

- the UE enter to Medium-mobility state.

- else if criteria for either Medium- or High-mobility state is not detected during time period T CRmaxHyst:

- the UE enter to Normal-mobility state.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 32 of 189


If the UE is in High- or Medium-mobility state, the UE shall apply the speed dependent scaling rules as defined here
under.

2.3.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-16: Mobility State 3Gpp vs Huawei parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedDepReselCfgInd Speed-dependent reselection parameter configure CellResel
indicator
TCRmax TEvaluation The duration for evaluating criteria to enter mobility CellResel
states
NCR_M NCellChangeMedium The number of cell changes to enter medium mobility CellResel
state
NCR-H NCellChangeHigh The number of cell changes to enter high mobility CellResel
state
TCRmaxHyst THystNormal The additional duration for evaluating criteria to enter CellResel
normal mobility state

2.3.2.3 Mobility criterion (scaling rules) for EUTRAN

There are two ways to ease the mobility of faster UE. One is to play on the hysteresis between cells, and another is
based on the time of evaluate other cells, both play a role on the ranking of the candidate cells. There is a separate
setting for both medium and high mobility.

2.3.2.3.1 Hysteresis
If the mobility is detected (medium or high) and if the sf-High or sf-Medium for Qhyst is broadcasted, the following is
applied to the hysteresis (Qhyst). A negative value in dB is added to the hysteresis, i.e. -4 dB. This is only for intra –
frequency candidates. These parameters are broadcasted on SIB3 if activated.
In normal mobility, Qhyst is used as such.

Table 2-17: 3Gpp Scaling rules for Qhyst parameters (EUTRAN)

Parameter Description
Qhyst Hysteresis
sf-High of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for Qhyst This is a negative value (dB) that will be applied to Qhyst
in case a high speed UE is detected
sf-Medium of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for Qhyst This is a negative value (dB) that will be applied to Qhyst
in case a medium speed UE is detected

2.3.2.3.2 Evaluation Time


If the mobility is detected (medium or high) and if the sf-High or sf-Medium for TreselectionEUTRA is broadcasted, the
following is applied to the evaluation time of candidates (TreselectionEUTRA). The evaluation is multiplied by a value
below 1, i.e. 0.5. This is for both intra-frequency and inter-frequency, the intra-frequency is broacasted on SIB3, and
on SIB5 for the inter-frequency if activated. In normal mobility, TreselectionEUTRA is used as such.

Table 2-18: 3Gpp Scaling rules for Treselection parameters (EUTRAN)

Parameter Description
TreselectionEUTRA The cell reselection timer value

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 33 of 189


sf-High of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionEUTRA in
case a high speed UE is detected.
sf-Medium of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionEUTRA in
case a medium speed UE is detected.

2.3.2.4 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-19: Scaling rules for Qhyst Huawei parameters (EUTRAN)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedDepReselCfgInd Speed-dependent reselection parameter configure CellResel
indicator
Qhyst Qhyst Hysteresis value for ranking criteria CellResel
sf-High QHystSfHigh Additional hysteresis applied in high mobility state to CellResel
q-Hyst
sf-Medium QHystSfMedium Additional hysteresis applied in medium mobility CellResel
state to q-Hyst

Table 2-20: Scaling rules for Treselection Huawei parameters (EUTRAN intra-frequency)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedStateSfCfgInd Speed state scale factor configure indicator CellResel
TreselectionEUTRA TReselEutran Cell reselection timer value for EUTRAN CellResel
sf-High TReselEutranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselEutra in high mobility state CellResel
sf-Medium TReselEutranSfMedium Scaling factor of TReselEutra in medium mobility CellResel
state

Table 2-21: Scaling rules for Treselection Huawei parameters (EUTRAN inter-frequency)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedDependSPCfgInd Speed dependent resel parameter configuring EutranInt
indicator erNFreq
TreselectionEUTRA EutranReselTime EUTRAN reselection time EutranInt
erNFreq
sf-High TReselEutranSfHigh Scaling factor of treseleutra in high mobility state EutranInt
erNFreq
sf-Medium TReselEutranSfMedium Scaling factor of treseleutra in medium mobility state EutranInt
erNFreq

2.3.2.5 Mobility criterion (scaling rules) for GERAN and UTRAN

For GERAN and UTRAN, only the second method exists, that is the evaluation time. So similar parameter exist for
reselction of GERAN and UTRAN.

If the mobility is detected (medium or high) and if the sf-High and sf-Medium for TreselectionGERA/UTRA is broadcasted,
the following is applied to the evaluation time of candidates (TreselectionGERA/UTRA). The evaluation is multiplied by a
value below 1, i.e. 0.5. In normal mobility, TreselectionGERA/UTRA is used as such when activated. These parameters are
broadcasted on SIB6 for UTRAN and SIB7 for GERAN.

Table 2-22: 3Gpp Scaling rules for TreselectionGERA parameters (GERAN)

Parameter Description
TreselectionGERA The cell reselection timer value

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 34 of 189


sf-High of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionGERA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionGERA in
case a high speed UE is detected.
sf-Medium of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionGERA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionGERA in
case a medium speed UE is detected.

Table 2-23: 3Gpp Scaling rules for TreselectionUTRA parameters (UTRAN)

Parameter Description
TreselectionUTRA The cell reselection timer value
sf-High of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionUTRA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionUTRA in
case a high speed UE is detected.
sf-Medium of "Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionUTRA This is a factor to apply to TreselectionUTRA in
case a medium speed UE is detected.

2.3.2.6 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-24: Scaling rules for TreselectionGERA Huawei parameters (GERAN)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedStateSfCfgInd Speed state scale factor configure indicator CellResel
Geran
TreselectionGERA TReselGERAN Cell reselection timer value for GERAN CellResel
Geran
sf-HighGERA TReselGeranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselGeran in high mobility state CellResel
Geran
sf-MediumGERA TReselGeranSfMedium Scaling factor of TReselGeran in medium mobility CellResel
state Geran

Table 2-25: Scaling rules for TreselectionUTRA Huawei parameters (UTRAN)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


SpeedStateSfCfgInd Speed state scale factor configure indicator CellResel
Utran
TreselectionUTRA TReselUTRAN Cell reselection timer value for UTRAN CellResel
Utran
sf-HighUTRA TReselUtranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselUtran in high mobility state CellResel
Utran
sf-MediumUTRA TReselUtranSfMedium Scaling factor of TReselUtran in medium mobility CellResel
state Utran

2.3.2.7 Network Current Parameter Values (Cell Reselection - Mobility)

As there are two different LTE layers in the network, both layer are defined here (LTE1800 and LTE800).

2.3.2.7.1 EUTRAN reselection parameter details

Cell Reselection
Mobility Parameter Details.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 35 of 189


2.3.2.7.2 EUTRAN reselection current network value

Table 2-26: Reselection EUTRAN current Huawei parameter values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
SpeedDepReselCfgIn Speed-dependent reselection CFG CFG CFG CFG
d parameter configure indicator
TEvaluation The duration for evaluating S60_T_EVA S60_T_EV S60_T_E S60_T_E
criteria to enter mobility states LULATION ALULATI VALULA VALULA
(60s) ON (60s) TION TION
(60s) (60s)
NCellChangeMedium The number of cell changes to 4 4 4 4
enter medium mobility state
NCellChangeHigh The number of cell changes to 8 8 8 8
enter high mobility state
THystNormal The additional duration for S30_T_HYS S30_T_HY S30_T_H S30_T_H
evaluating criteria to enter T_NORMA ST_NORM YST_NO YST_NO
normal mobility state L (30s) AL (30s) RMAL RMAL
(30s) (30s)
SpeedDepReselCfgIn Speed-dependent reselection CFG CFG CFG CFG
d parameter configure indicator
Qhyst Hysteresis value for ranking DB4_Q_HY DB4_Q_H DB4_Q_H DB4_Q_H
criteria ST (4dB) YST (4dB) YST YST
(4dB) (4dB)
QHystSfHigh Additional hysteresis applied in DB0_Q_HY DB0_Q_H DB0_Q_H DB0_Q_H
high mobility state to q-Hyst ST_SF_HIG YST_SF_H YST_SF_ YST_SF_
H (0dB) IGH (0dB) HIGH HIGH
(0dB) (0dB)
QHystSfMedium Additional hysteresis applied in DB0_Q_HY DB0_Q_H DB0_Q_H DB0_Q_H
medium mobility state to q-Hyst ST_SF_ME YST_SF_M YST_SF_ YST_SF_
DIUM (0dB) EDIUM MEDIUM MEDIUM
(0dB) (0dB) (0dB)
TReselEutran Cell reselection timer value for 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s)
EUTRAN
TReselEutranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselEutra in T_RESEL_S T_RESEL_ T_RESEL T_RESEL
high mobility state F_0DOT75 SF_0DOT7 _SF_0DO _SF_0DO
(0.75) 5 (0.75) T75 (0.75) T75 (0.75)
TReselEutranSfMediu Scaling factor of TReselEutra in T_RESEL_S T_RESEL_ T_RESEL T_RESEL
m medium mobility state F_1DOT0 SF_1DOT0 _SF_1DO _SF_1DO
(1s) (1s) T0 (1s) T0 (1s)
ThrshServLow Serving frequency lower priority 6 (-116dBm) 6 (- 6 (- 11 (-
threshold 116dBm) 116dBm) 104dBm)
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 4 5 4 5
MeasBandWidthCfgI Measurement bandwidth NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CF NOT_CF
nd configure indicator G G
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth
NeighCellConfig Neighbor cell config BitString01 BitString01 BitString0 BitString0
1 1
PresenceAntennaPort Presence antenna port1 BOOLEAN_ BOOLEAN BOOLEA BOOLEA
1 FALSE _FALSE N_FALSE N_FALSE

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 36 of 189


ThrshServLowQCfgIn Serving frequency lower priority NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CF NOT_CF
d RSRQ threshold configure G G
indicator
ThrshServLowQ Serving frequency lower priority
RSRQ threshold

Note: NeighCellConfig is only for TDD LTE, so it can be ignored here.

2.3.2.7.3 GERAN reselection parameter details

CellResel Parameters
GERAN.xlsx

2.3.2.7.4 GERAN reselection current network value

Table 2-27: Reselection GERAN current Huawei parameter values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
SpeedStateSfCfgInd Speed state scale factor configure NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG
indicator
TReselGERAN Cell reselection timer value for 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s)
GERAN
TReselGeranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselGeran in
high mobility state
TReselGeranSfMedium Scaling factor of TReselGeran in
medium mobility state

2.3.2.7.5 UTRAN reselection parameter details

CellResel Parameters
UTRAN.xlsx

2.3.2.7.6 UTRAN reselection current network value

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 37 of 189


Table 2-28: Reselection UTRAN current Huawei parameter values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
SpeedStateSfCfgInd Speed state scale factor configure NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG NOT_CFG
indicator
TReselUTRAN Cell reselection timer value for 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s) 1 (1s)
UTRAN
TReselUtranSfHigh Scaling factor of TReselUtran in
high mobility state
TReselUtranSfMedium Scaling factor of TReselUtran in
medium mobility state

2.3.3 Other reselection parameters

In the cell reselection parameter group, other parameters are listed as well. Here below the additional parameters.
These parameters are related to priorities (lower priority case), RSRQ additional conditions, bandwidth,…

Table 2-29: Other Huawei reselection parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


ThrshServLow Serving frequency lower priority threshold CellResel
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority CellResel
MeasBandWidthCfgInd Measurement bandwidth configure indicator CellResel
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth CellResel
NeighCellConfig Neighbor cell config CellResel
PresenceAntennaPort1 Presence antenna port1 CellResel

ThrshServLowQCfgInd Serving frequency lower priority RSRQ CellResel


threshold configure indicator
ThrshServLowQ Serving frequency lower priority RSRQ CellResel
threshold

Regarding the priorities, one parameter defines the current serving layer priority. In case of LTE 1800, the priority
is set to 5, so the parameter “CellReselPriority” must be set to 5. Please refer to the priorities in 2.3.1.

The IE “MeasBandWidth” is used to indicate the maximum allowed measurement bandwidth on a carrier
frequency as defined by the parameter Transmission Bandwidth Configuration "NRB" TS 36.104 [47].

“NeighCellConfig” indicates the information related to MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single
Frequency Network) and TDD UL/DL configurations of intra-frequency neighboring cells of the serving cell. It is
set to “01” which means that none of the neighboring cells is configured with MBSFN subframes. Please refer to
3Gpp TS 36.331 for more details on this. It is used for MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service). It is
present here, as normally for mobility the UE considers that the MBSFN area is continuous when the source cell and
the target cell broadcast the same value in the mbsfn-AreaId.
The parameter “PresenceAntennaPort1” is used when the neighbours are using DL diversity (transmitting on two
antennas), this can be used, but there is no impact on the network.
These parameters are broadcasted on SIB3 for the intra – frequency, SIB5 for the inter – frequency, and SIB6 and
SIB7 for repectiverly Utran and Geran. The Huawei coresponding tables are as following: GeranNfreqGroup,
UtranNfreq and EutraninterNfreq.

For the other parameters: ThrshServLow, ThrshServLowQCfgInd, and ThrshServLowQ, refer to the next
chapter: Ranking.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 38 of 189


2.3.4 Ranking (“R” criteria)

2.3.4.1 Cell reselection ranking criteria (Intra-freq. and equal priority for inter-freq.)

2.3.4.1.1 Criteria
The UE will rank all the candidates that fullfill the cell selection “S” criteria, so the one with Srxlev > 0 and Squal >
0 (Rel. 9). RSRP will be considerred for Rel. 8, additionnaly RSRQ will be considerred for Rel.9.
The cell reselection will occur as soon as the best candidate is better than the serving cell for a duration of T reselection
and if the UE has camped more than one second on the current serving cell. Most of the parameters here below are
per neighbour link parameters, so it can differ from one neighbour link to another (usually when it comes from a
table where “Ncell” is part of the table name).

For the serving cell:


Rs = Q meas,s + Q hyst

For the neihbour cells


Rn = Q meas,n + Q offset

where,

Qmeas,s,n is the measured RSRP by the UE

For intra-frequency, Q offset,s,n is broadcasted on SIB4, if activated, otherwise the value will be 0

For inter-frequency,
Q offset = Q offset,s,n + Q offsetfrequency

Q offset,s,n and Q offsetfrequency are broadcasted on SIB5, if activated, otherwise the value will be 0.

After ranking the cell with the best Rn is choosen.

Notes:
- Treselection is adapted by the scaling factor used by the UE mobility detection if active (refer to
2.3.2);
- Treselection; is broadcasted on SIB3 for intra-frequency and on SIB5 for inter-frequency.

2.3.4.1.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 2-30: “R” criteria offset Huawei parameters (EUTRAN)

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Q offset,s,n CellQoffset Cell offset EutranIntraFreqNCell
Q offsetfrequency QoffsetFreq Frequency offset EutranInterNFreq
Q offset,s,n CellQoffset Cell offset EutranInterFreqNCell
Qhyst Qhyst Hysteresis value for ranking criteria CellResel

2.3.4.1.3 Huawei Current Parameter Values

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 39 of 189


Table 2-31: “R” criteria offset parameter current values (EUTRAN)

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
CellQoffset (Intra- Cell offset (Intra-freq) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
freq)
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset dB1 (1 dB) dB1 (1 dB) dB1 (1 dB1 (1
dB) dB)
CellQoffset Cell offset dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
Qhyst Hysteresis value for ranking DB4_Q_HY DB4_Q_H DB4_Q_H DB4_Q_H
criteria ST (4dB) YST (4dB) YST YST
(4dB) (4dB)

2.3.4.2 Cell reselection ranking criteria (Inter-RAT and different priority for inter-frequency)

2.3.4.2.1 Criteria

Rel. 8 and before

Towards a higher priority inter-frequency or Inter-RAT cell.

- Srxlevn > ThreshHigh for Treselection and the UE should have spent at least one second on the serving
cell
where,

Srxlevn = Qrxlevmeas,n – Qrxlevmin,n– Pcompensationn

Pcompensationn = max(PEMAX,n –PPowerClass,n, 0)

Towards a lower priority inter-frequency or Inter-RAT cell.

- In this case, no cells with higher priority should be available in the list;
- There are no intra-frequency cells or inter-frequency cells with equal priority available in the list
- Srxlevs < ThreshServLow and Srxlevn > ThreshLow and for Treselection and the UE should have
spent at least one second on the serving cell.

where,

Srxlevn = Qrxlevmeas,n – Qrxlevmin,n– Pcompensationn

Pcompensationn = max(PEMAX,n –PPowerClass,n, 0)

Srxlevs = Qrxlevmeas,s – Qrxlevmin,s– Pcompensations

Pcompensations = max(PEMAX,s –PPowerClass,s, 0)

Notes:
- In case several candidates meet the criteria, these candidates are ranked as for intra-frequency
ranking criteria (Rs, Rn);

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 40 of 189


- Treselection is adapted by the scaling factor used by the UE mobility detection if active (refer to
2.3.2);
- Qrxlevmin,n ; PEMAX,n ; PPowerClass,n ; are broadcasted by SIB5, SIB6, SIB7 for inter-frequency EUTRAN,
UTRAN, GERAN cells respectively;
- ThreshLow, ThreshHigh do not exist in Huawei sRAN3, they are replaced by ThreshXLowP,
ThreshXHighP respectivelly (please refer for Rel. 9).

Since Rel.9

Towards a higher priority inter-frequency or Inter-RAT cell.

If ThreshServLowQ is present on SIB3, the cell reselection to an inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell with a higher
priority than the serving can be performed if:

EUTRAN or UTRAN FDD

- Squaln > ThreshXHighQ for Treselection and the UE should have spent at least one second on the
serving cell
GSM

- Srxlevn > ThreshXHighP for Treselection and the UE should have spent at least one second on the
serving cell

else,

- Srxlevn > ThreshXHighP for Treselection and the UE should have spent at least one second on the
serving cell

where,

Srxlevn = Qrxlevmeas,n – Qrxlevmin,n– Pcompensationn

Pcompensationn = max(PEMAX,n –PPowerClass,n, 0)

Squaln = Qqualmeas,n – Qqualmin,n

Qrxlevmeas and Qqualmeas are the RSRP and RSRQ measured respectivelly.

Towards a lower priority inter-frequency or Inter-RAT cell.

If ThreshServLowQ is present on SIB3, the cell reselection to an inter-frequency or intre-RAT cell with a higher
priority than the serving cell can be performed if:

EUTRAN or UTRAN FDD

- Squals < ThreshServLowQ and Squaln > ThreshXLowQ for Treselection and the UE should have spent
at least one second on the serving cell
GSM

- Squals < ThreshServLowQ and Srxlevn > ThreshXLowP for Treselection and the UE should have spent
at least one second on the serving cell
-
else,

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 41 of 189


- Srxlevs < ThreshServLowP and Srxlevn > ThreshXLowP for Treselection and the UE should have
spent at least one second on the serving cell

where,

Srxlevn = Qrxlevmeas,n – Qrxlevmin,n– Pcompensationn

Pcompensationn = max(PEMAX,n –PPowerClass,n, 0)

Srxlevs = Qrxlevmeas,s – Qrxlevmin,s– Pcompensations

Pcompensations = max(PEMAX,s –PPowerClass,s, 0)

Squaln = Qqualmeas,n – Qqualmin,n

Squals = Qqualmeas,s – Qqualmin,s

Qrxlevmeas and Qqualmeas are the measured RSRP and RSRQ respectivelly.

Notes:
- In case several candidates meet the criteria, these high priority candidates are ranked as for intra-
frequency ranking criteria (Rs, Rn) for inter-frequency. If the high priority candidates are from
inter-RAT, then the ranking should be done with the inter-RAT criteria;
- Treselection is adapted by the scaling factor used by the UE mobility detection if active (refer to
2.3.2);
- Qrxlevmin,n ; Qqualmin,n ; PEMAX,n ; PPowerClass,n ; ThreshXHighQ; ThreshXHighP; ThreshXLowQ;
ThreshXLowP are broadcasted by SIB5, SIB6, SIB7 for inter-frequency EUTRAN, UTRAN,
GERAN cells respectively;
- ThreshServLowQ; ThreshServLowP; are broadcasted on SIB3.

Table 2-32: 3Gpp Ranking Parameters

Parameter Description
Treselection Cell reselection evaluation time
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell Rx level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required Rx level in the cell (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Pcompensation max(PEMAX –PPowerClass, 0) (dB)
PEMAX Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell
(dBm) defined as PEMAX in [TS 36.101]
PPowerClass Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as
defined in [TS 36.101]
ThreshHigh RSRP threshold for higher priority neighbour, is replaced by ThreshXHighP in Rel.9
ThreshLow RSRP threshold for lower priority neighbour, is replaced by ThreshXLowP in Rel.9
ThreshXHighQ RSRQ threshold for higher priority neighbour
ThreshXHighP RSRP threshold for higher priority neighbour, is replacing ThreshHigh in Rel. 9
ThreshServLowQ Serving frequency lower priority RSRQ threshold, is replacing ThreshLow in Rel. 9
ThreshServLowP Serving frequency lower priority RSRP threshold
ThreshXLowQ RSRQ threshold for lower priority neighbour
ThreshXLowP RSRP threshold for lower priority neighbour

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 42 of 189


Note: these parameters are specific for EUTRAN, UTRAN and GERAN.

2.3.4.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

GERAN

Regarding GERAN neighbours, a group of frequencies is created, this group can contain GSM and DCS
frequencies. This group will be seen as a whole from the EUTRAN. Only RxLev and the priority of GERAN
neighbours are taken into account.

Table 2-33: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking GERAN Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Treselection TReselGeran Cell reselection timer value for GERAN CellReselGeran
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level GeranNfreqGroup
PmaxGeranCfgInd PMAX configure indicator GeranNfreqGroup
PEMAX PmaxGeran PMAX GeranNfreqGroup
ThreshHigh (*) (*)
ThreshLow (*) (*)
ThreshXHighP ThreshXHigh High priority threshold GeranNfreqGroup
ThreshXLowP ThreshXLow Lower priority threshold GeranNfreqGroup

(*) These parameters are from Rel. 8 and are replaced by ThreshXHighP and ThreshXLowP since Rel. 9

Other GERAN Huawei reselection parameters to be considered as well for the cell reselection

Table 2-34: Other Huawei Ranking GERAN Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority configure GeranNfreqGroup
indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority GeranNfreqGroup
BcchGroupId BCCH group ID GeranNfreqGroup
GeranVersion Geran version GeranNfreqGroup
StartingArfcn Starting ARFCN GeranNfreqGroup
BandIndicator Band indicator GeranNfreqGroup
NccPermitted NCC monitoring permitted GeranNfreqGroup

UTRAN

Table 2-35: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking UTRAN Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Treselection TReselUtran Cell reselection timer value for UTRAN CellReselUtran
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level UtranNFreq
Qqualmin Qqualmin Minimum required quality level UtranNFreq
PEMAX PmaxUtran PMAX UtranNFreq
ThreshHigh (*) (*)
ThreshLow (*) (*)
ThreshXHighQ ThreshXHighQ UTRAN high priority RSRQ threshold UtranNFreq
ThreshXHighP ThreshXHigh UTRAN high priority threshold UtranNFreq
ThreshXLowQ ThreshXLowQ UTRAN low priority RSRQ threshold UtranNFreq
ThreshXLowP ThreshXLow UTRAN lower priority threshold UtranNFreq

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 43 of 189


(*) These parameters are from Rel. 8 and are replaced by ThreshXHighP and ThreshXLowP since Rel. 9

Other UTRAN Huawei reselection parameters to be considered as well for the cell reselection

Table 2-36: Other Huawei Ranking UTRAN Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority configure UtranNFreq
indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority UtranNFreq
UtranDlArfcn Downlink UARFCN UtranNFreq
UtranVersion UTRAN version UtranNFreq
UtranFddTddType UTRAN cell type indicator UtranNFreq
UtranUlArfcnCfgInd Uplink UARFCN indicator UtranNFreq
UtranUlArfcn Uplink UARFCN UtranNFreq

EUTRAN

Table 2-37: 3Gpp vs Huawei Ranking EUTRAN Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Treselection EutranReselTime EUTRAN reselection time EutranInterNFreq
Qrxlevmin QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level EutranInterNFreq
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum inter-frequency reselection EutranInterNFreq
required quality level configure indicator
Qqualmin QQualMin Minimum inter-frequency reselection EutranInterNFreq
required quality level
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure indicator EutranInterNFreq
PEMAX PMax Max transmit power allowed EutranInterNFreq
ThreshHigh (*) (*)
ThreshLow (*) (*)
ThreshXHighQ ThreshXHighQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ EutranInterNFreq
threshold
ThreshXHighP ThreshXHigh Inter frequency high priority threshold EutranInterNFreq
ThreshXLowQ ThreshXLowQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ EutranInterNFreq
threshold
ThreshXLowP ThreshXLow Inter frequency lower priority threshold EutranInterNFreq

(*) These parameters are from Rel. 8 and are replaced by ThreshXHighP and ThreshXLowP since Rel. 9

Other EUTRAN (inter-frequency) Huawei reselection parameters to be considered as well for the cell reselection.

Table 2-38: Other Huawei Ranking EUTRAN (inter-frequency) Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority configure EutranInterNFreq
indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority EutranInterNFreq
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth EutranInterNFreq
NeighCellConfig Neighbor cell config EutranInterNFreq

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 44 of 189


PresenceAntennaPort1 Presence antenna port1 EutranInterNFreq

2.3.4.2.3 Huawei Ranking Current Parameter Values

GERAN as target

Table 2-39: Ranking parameter current value (GERAN)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Current Values


Values
TReselGeran Cell reselection timer value for 1 1s
GERAN
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level 0 -115dBm
PmaxGeranCfgInd PMAX configure indicator NOT_CFG Not Active
PmaxGeran PMAX UE Power Capability
ThreshXHigh High priority threshold 7 -101dBm
ThreshXLow Lower priority threshold 7 -101dBm
CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority CFG Active
configure indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 0 0
BcchGroupId BCCH group ID 0 Group 0
GeranVersion Geran version EDGE EDGE
StartingArfcn Starting ARFCN 29 29
BandIndicator Band indicator GSM_dcs1800 GSM900 and
DCS1800 ARFCN
NccPermitted NCC monitoring permitted 255

UTRAN (U2100 (f1, f2) as target)

Table 2-40: Ranking parameter current value (UTRAN, U2100)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
TReselUtran Cell reselection timer value for UTRAN 1 1s
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -58 -116dBm
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level -12 -12dB (EcNo)
PmaxUtran PMAX 24 24dBm
ThreshXHighQ UTRAN high priority RSRQ threshold 0 0dB
ThreshXHigh UTRAN high priority threshold 6 -104dBm
ThreshXLowQ UTRAN low priority RSRQ threshold 0 0dB
ThreshXLow UTRAN lower priority threshold 3 -110dBm
CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority CFG Active
configure indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 2 2
UtranDlArfcn Downlink UARFCN 10811 10811
UtranVersion UTRAN version HSPA HSPA
UtranFddTddType UTRAN cell type indicator UTRAN_FDD FDD
UtranUlArfcnCfgInd Uplink UARFCN indicator NOT_CFG Not Active
UtranUlArfcn Uplink UARFCN Not Active

UTRAN (U900 as target)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 45 of 189


Table 2-41: Ranking parameter current value (UTRAN, U900)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
TReselUtran Cell reselection timer value for UTRAN 1 1s
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -58 -116dBm
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level -12 -12dB (EcNo)
PmaxUtran PMAX 24 24dBm
ThreshXHighQ UTRAN high priority RSRQ threshold 0 0dB
ThreshXHigh UTRAN high priority threshold 6 -104dBm
ThreshXLowQ UTRAN low priority RSRQ threshold 0 0dB
(EcNo)
ThreshXLow UTRAN lower priority threshold 3 -110dBm
CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority CFG Active
configure indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 1 1
UtranDlArfcn Downlink UARFCN 3081 3081
UtranVersion UTRAN version HSPA HSPA
UtranFddTddType UTRAN cell type indicator UTRAN_FDD FDD
UtranUlArfcnCfgInd Uplink UARFCN indicator NOT_CFG Not Active
UtranUlArfcn Uplink UARFCN Not Active

EUTRAN (L800 as target)

Table 2-42: Ranking parameter current value (EUTRAN, L800)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
EutranReselTime EUTRAN reselection time 1 1s
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -64 -128dBm
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum inter-frequency reselection NOT_CFG Not Active
required quality level configure
indicator
QQualMin Minimum inter-frequency reselection Not Active
required quality level
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure NOT_CFG Not Active
indicator
PMax Max transmit power allowed Not Active
ThreshXHighQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ 0
threshold
ThreshXHigh Inter frequency high priority threshold 11 -106dBm
ThreshXLowQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ 0
threshold
ThreshXLow Inter frequency lower priority threshold 7 -114dBm
CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority CFG Active
configure indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 4 4
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth MBW50 10MHz
PresenceAntennaPort1 Presence antenna port1 BOOLEAN_FALSE Not Used

EUTRAN (L1800 as target)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 46 of 189


Table 2-43: Ranking parameter current value (EUTRAN, L1800)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
EutranReselTime EUTRAN reselection time 1 1s
QRxLevMin Minimum required RX level -64 -128dBm
QQualMinCfgInd Minimum inter-frequency reselection NOT_CFG Not Active
required quality level configure
indicator
QQualMin Minimum inter-frequency reselection Not Active
required quality level
PMaxCfgInd Ue max power allowed configure NOT_CFG Not Active
indicator
PMax Max transmit power allowed Not Active
ThreshXHighQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ 0
threshold
ThreshXHigh Inter frequency high priority threshold 13 -102 dBm
ThreshXLowQ Inter frequency high priority RSRQ 0
threshold
ThreshXLow Inter frequency lower priority threshold 11 -106 dBm
CellReselPriorityCfgInd Inter frequency cell resel priority CFG Active
configure indicator
CellReselPriority Cell reselection priority 5 5
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth MBW75 15MHz
PresenceAntennaPort1 Presence antenna port1 BOOLEAN_FALSE Not Used

2.3.4.3 Reselection Ranking parameter details

CellResel Parameters
Ranking.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 47 of 189


2.4 Reselection Example

Figure 2-2: Reselection example

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 48 of 189


Figure 2-3: Reselection example

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 49 of 189


Figure 2-4: Reselection example

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 50 of 189


2.5 Cell Reselection Summary (Rel. 8)

2.5.1 L800 and L1800 layers

Figure 2-5: L800 and L1800 layers non-colocated

Site A Site B
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1) F1/U9 L1800 Priority 5
Priority 1 U900 RSRP < -116 dBm
& L8 If RSRP L1800 <
-106 dBm
RSCP > -110 dBm
If RSRP L800 >
and EcNo > -12 dB L800 Priority
dBm4
Priority 0 G180 -114
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18

RSRP > -114 dBm

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 51 of 189


Figure 2-6: L800 and L1800 layers colocated

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 52 of 189


Page 53 of 189
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar


F1/U9 L1800 Priority 5
Priority 1 U900 RSRP < -116 dBm
& L8 If RSRP L1800 <
-106 dBm
RSCP > -110 dBm
If RSRP L800 >
and EcNo > -12 dB L800 Priority
dBm4
Priority 0 G180 -114
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18
RSRP > -114 dBm
Notes:

 When L1800 and L800 are present, the user will first reselect L800 before going to other technologies;
 When the user is in conditions to reselect a 2G cell, the user will reselect G900, not G1800 as usually G900 is 6 to 10dB better in terms of level, the
priority is the lowest and the same for both G900 and G1800;
 When the user is in conditions to reselect a 3G cell, it will preferably do it to U900, as it is usually better by 6 to 10 dB in terms of level. Otherwise it
will do it to U2100, but on f1 only;
 This is only for Rel.8 and before, as for Rel.9 and later, RSRQ is also a criteria (if active);
 The setting is the same for colocated technologies, and non colocated technologies. But could evolve in the future;
 These figures also show the reselection from GSM and UMTS to be complete, they are are addressed in the next chapter.

L800 layer only

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 54 of 189


Figure 2-7: L800 layer non-colocated

Site A Site B
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1) F1/U9
Priority 1 U900
RSRP < -116 dBm
&
RSCP > -110 dBm
L800 Priority 4
Priority 0 G180 and EcNo > -12 dB
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18

RSRP > -114 dBm

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 55 of 189


Figure 2-8: L800 layer colocated

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 56 of 189


Page 57 of 189
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar


F1/U9
Priority 1 U900
RSRP < -116 dBm
&
RSCP > -110 dBm
L800 Priority 4
Priority 0 G180 and EcNo > -12 dB
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18
RSRP > -114 dBm
No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 58 of 189
2.5.2 L1800 layer only

Figure 2-9: L1800 layers non-colocated

Site A Site B
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1) F1/U9 L1800 Priority 5
Priority 1 U900
RSRP < -116 dBm
&
RSCP > -110 dBm
Priority 0 G180 and EcNo > -12 dB
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18

RSRP > -114 dBm

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 59 of 189


Figure 2-10: L1800 layers colocated

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 60 of 189


Page 61 of 189
Layer Priority Layer Priority
U210
Priority 2 0 (f2) RSRP > -114 dBm
U210
0 (f1)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar


F1/U9 L1800 Priority 5
Priority 1 U900
RSRP < -116 dBm
&
RSCP > -110 dBm
Priority 0 G180 and EcNo > -12 dB
RSRP < -116 dBm
0
&
Priority 0 G900 RSSI > -101 dBm
G9-G18
RSRP > -114 dBm
No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 62 of 189
2.5.3 Intra-frequency reselection

Figure 2-11: L800 and L1800 intra-frequency

If RSRPN > RSRPS + 4 dB (Qhyst)

L1800 L1800

If RSRPN > RSRPS + 4 dB (Qhyst)

L800 L800

Notes:
- this applies to single and dual layer sites, the cell offset is set to 0dB;
- the SintraSearch is set to -70 dBm.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 63 of 189


2.5.4 Inter-frequency reselection

Figure 2-12: L800 and L1800 inter-frequency

Site A Site B

Priority
L1800 L1800
=5
If RSRP L1800 <
If RSRP L1800 > -102 -116 dBm
dBm If RSRP L800 > -114
dBm
If RSRP L1800 <
If RSRP L1800 > -112 -106 dBm
dBm If RSRP L800 > -114
L800 L800 dBm Priority
=4

Notes:
- this applies to single and dual layer sites, the total cell offset is set to 1dB, so an additional dB needs to be added to the neighbours RSRP;
- SnonIntraSearch = -114 dBm except for dual layer L1800 where it is -104 dBm.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 64 of 189


No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 65 of 189
3 GSM/UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection

3.1 GSM to LTE Cell Reselection

This functionality has been introduced since Rel. 8, with the arrival of the LTE technology. The UE must be LTE
compliant, and the SIM/USIM should allow this technology. As for GSM to UMTS reselection, the necessary
information is broacasted on the system information type 2Quater (SI2Quater ). This type of inter-RAT reselection is
priority based. In this case, the LTE network has the highest priority.
The Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE feature can be used only if neighboring LTE cells are configured.
Each GSM cell can be configured with a maximum of 64 LTE neighboring cells. These neighboring cells can use a
maximum of eight LTE frequencies. The respective 3Gpp references are: TS 45.008 & TS 44.060.

3.1.1 Cell Reselection feature configuration and activation

3.1.1.1 Priority Network Configuration

The priorities need to be set for all technologies. The current priorities are listed in 2.3.1. Here below the priority
parameter concerned:
Table 3-44: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection Huawei Priority Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


EUTRANPRI EUTRAN Priority GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS
NCELLPRI Neighboring Cell Priority GLTENCELL
GERANPRI GERAN Priority GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS
Note: NCELLPRI is per neighbour individual priority, usually it is not used. If it is defined, this priority is
overtaking the EUTRAN priority defined by EUTRANPRI (common priority for the LTE network). In order to
ignore NCELLPRI, it must be set to 255. The UE should get the priority information from the network.

3.1.1.2 Activation

In order to allow the UE to reselect an LTE cell from GSM, the SI2Quater should be broadcasted with the necessary
LTE information (neighbouring LTE cells and related parameters), this broadcast is controlled by the following
parameters: LTECELLRESELEN and Send2QuterFlag . These parameters need to be set to YES.
The parameter THRPRISEARCH trigger the inter-RAT measurements. The inter-RAT measurements could be
permanent, in that case this parameter needs to be set to “Always” (15), or the measueremnts can be triggered as
soon as the the GSM serving cell and the GSM neighbour cells RSSI is below this parameter.
Table 3-45: : GSM to LTE Cell Reselection Huawei Activation Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


LTECELLRESELEN LTE Cell Reselection Allowed GCELLHOBASIC
Send2QuterFlag Support Sent 2QUATER OTHSOFTPARA
THRPRISEARCH GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS

3.1.1.3 Neigbour definition

The LTE neighbours must be defined in the following table:

 GLTENCELL
 GEXTLTECELL

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 66 of 189


In the first table GLTENCELL all GSM-LTE neighbours are defined (source-taret), and in the second one, all LTE
cells that appears in the first table must be defined as external. Most probably an LTE cell defined in the
GEXTLTECELL will be used several times in GLTENCELL.

GLTENCELL table content (parameters)

Table 3-46: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection - neighbours definition (GLTENCELL)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Value


BSCName BSC Name  
BIDIRECTION Add Bidirection Neighboring Cell Or Not  
SRCCELLNAME Source cell name  
NBRCELLNAME Neighbor cell name  
SRCLTENCELLID Source Cell Index  
NBRLTENCELLID Neighbor Cell Index  
SPTRESEL Support Cell Reselection SUPPORT
SPTBLINDHO Support Blind Handover UNSUPPORT
SPTRAPIDSEL Support Rapid Reselection UNSUPPORT
NCELLPRI Neighboring Cell Priority 255

The first parameters like the BSC Name,… are variable. The last 4 are default ones, the ones important here are
SPTRESEL and NCELLPRI. When the Fast Reselection feature is activated (see next feature topic 3.1.3), the
parameter: SPTRAPIDSEL will be set to SUPPORT.

GEXTLTECELL table content (parameters)

Table 3-47: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection - neighbours definition (GEXTLTECELL)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Value


BSCName BSC Name  
EXTLTECELLID Cell Index  
EXTLTECELLNAME Cell Name  
MCC MCC 206
MNC MNC 10
ENODEBTYPE eNodeB Type MACRO
CI Cell CI  
TAC Cell TAC  
FREQ EARFCN  
PCID Physical Cell ID  
EUTRANTYPE EUTRAN Cell Type FDD
OPNAME Operator Name

Some parameters are constant and network dependent here, like the MCC, MNC, EUTRANTYPE, OPNAME, some
others are variable, and change on aper cell/link basis.

Neighbour parameter details

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 67 of 189


GSM LTE NB.xlsx

3.1.2 Triggering Conditions

3.1.2.1 GERAN priority is lower than EUTRAN priority (GERANPRI < EUTRANPRI)

In case the EUTRAN priority is higher than the GERAN priority (serving cell), this is the case in this network, and
that the individual priority NCELLPRI is set to 255, the conditions for the target cell are as following:

S_NonServingEUTRANN > THREUTRANHIGH for at least TRESEL

Where,
S_NonServingEUTRANN : RSRPN – EUTRANQRXLEVMIN
Where,
RSRPN is the measured RSRP of one LTE neighbours;
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN is also broadcasted on the SI2quater and represent the absolute minimum RSRP
allowed for reselection.

THREUTRANHIGH: is broadcasted on the SI2quater and represents the higher priority EUTRAN cell threshold.
TRESEL: is the period time during the conditions must be met.

In case several LTE neighbours have the same priority, which is the case when individual priority NCELLPRI is set
to 255, the one with the best RSRPN is selected.

Note: when the EUTRAN cells have a higher priority than the GERAN, EUTRAN cells are always reported as
candidates, whatever the serving cell conditions, the parameter THRPRISEARCH do not play a role here.

3.1.2.2 EUTRAN priority is lower than GERAN priority (GERANPRI > EUTRANPRI)

In case the EUTRAN priority is lower than the GERAN priority (serving cell), and that the individual priority
NCELLPRI is set to 255, the conditions for the target cell are as following:

If C1 < THRGSMLOW and S_NonServingEUTRANN > THREUTRANLOW for at least TRESEL

then the conditions are met for the target cell. If several EUTRAN cells have the same priority, then the one with the
best RSRP will be selected.

Where,
C1: is the GSM Path Loss C1 criteria of the serving cell;
S_NonServingEUTRANN : RSRPN – EUTRANQRXLEVMIN;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 68 of 189


Where,
RSRPN is the measured RSRP of one LTE neighbours;
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN is also broadcasted on the SI2quater and represent the absolute minimum RSRP
allowed for reselection.

THRGSMLOW: is the GSM serving cell and GSM neighbour cells threshold broadcasted on SI2quater;
TRESEL: is the period time during the conditions must be met;
THREUTRANLOW: is broadcasted on the SI2quater and represents the lower priority EUTRAN cell threshold.

If no cells meet these criterion for at least TRESEL, then the target cell will be the one where
S_NonServingEUTRANN is greater than C1+HPRIO. The best one will be used in case several cells have their
S_NonServingEUTRANN above C1+HPRIO.

C1: is the GSM Path Loss C1 criteria of the serving cell;


HPRIO: is broadcasted on the SI2quater;
S_NonServingEUTRANN : RSRPN – EUTRANQRXLEVMIN;
Where,
RSRPN is the measured RSRP of one LTE neighbours;
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN is also broadcasted on the SI2quater and represent the absolute minimum RSRP
allowed for reselection.

Notes:
- UTRAN priority also needs to be considered;
- Cell reselection to a cell of another radio access technology (e.g. UTRAN) shall not occur within
5 seconds after the MS has reselected a GSM cell from an inter-RAT cell if a suitable GSM cell
can be found.

3.1.2.3 Network Current Parameter Values (GSM-LTE Cell Reselection)

These parameters can be found in table: GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 69 of 189


Table 3-48: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection – current parameter values

Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name
Values Values
GERANPRI GERAN Priority 0 0
UTRANPRI UTRAN Priority 1 (U900), 2 (U2100) 1, 2
EUTRANPRI EUTRAN Priority 5 (L1800), 4 (L800) 4, 5
THRPRISEARCH Inter-RAT Search THD Based on Priority 15 Always
THRGSMLOW Low GSM Threshold Based on Priority 0 C1 > 0
THREUTRANHIGH EUTRAN Cell Resel High THD Based on PRI 8 -112 dBm
THREUTRANLOW EUTRAN Cell Resel Low THD Based on PRI 8 -112 dBm
Min RX Level of EUTRAN Cell Based on
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN 6 -128 dBm
PRI
HPRIO Cell Resel Level Hyst Based on PRI 0 0 dB
TRESEL Cell Resel Time Hyst Based on PRI 0 5s

As known already, GERAN has the lowest priority, so the idea is to move back to LTE as soon as possible, so that
the user is in the best conditions to make a data call (expected throughput). In case the user would like to start a CS
call while being on the LTE network, the so called CS fallback feature exists. See in related chapter.
The UE is always searching for the LTE network, as the parameter THRPRISEARCH is set to “always”. So as soon
as the UE find an LTE cell with an RSRP greater tha -112 dBm during at least 5 second, it will reselect that cell if it
is allowed to (no barred cell,…).

Note: the following parameter are common for UTRAN reselection: TRESEL, HPRIO, THRGSMLOW,
THRPRISEARCH. There are specific thersholds for UTRAN, as there are for EUTRAN.

3.1.2.4 Other reselection parameters

The following parameters are in the same table: GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS, but are used in case the feature eNC2
(Network Control Reselection) is active (it isn’t currently), in that case the network is controlling the reselection
based on measurement reports, this is especially usefull in case of load balance featuring,…:

Table 3-49: GSM to LTE Cell Reselection – other parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
Never (no
QPEUTRAN EUTRAN Cell Search Thres. in Packet Mode  15 EUTRAN cell
search
THREUTRANRPT EUTRAN Cell Reporting Threshold  0 -140 dBm
BESTEUTRANCELLNUM Number EUTRAN Cells in Best Cell List  2 2

3.1.2.5 GSM-LTE reselection Parameter details

GSM to (E)UTRAN
Reselection Parameters GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS v2.xlsx

3.1.3 Fast return to LTE (Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 70 of 189


The fast LTE reselection at CS call release is an optional feature that permits the UE to quickly returned to LTE
after a CS call, this is usefull since the CS call are done on another technology (also refer to CS Fall back). UE must
be compliant with R6. The idea is to provide the UE with the necessary informtion during the call release phase in
order to immediatelly reselect the LTE cell without having to go through the idle mode reselection procedure
explained here above.

Figure 3-13: Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release - message flow

3.1.3.1 Feature activation


First the LTE neighbours need to be created in the following tables: GLTENCELL and GEXTLTECELL as
explained earlier. In order to have the feature activated, the parameter SPTRAPIDSEL needs to be set to SUPPORT.
This parameter is set on a per neighbour link basis.

Table 3-50: Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS call release - neighbours definition (GLTENCELL)

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Value


BSCName BSC Name  
BIDIRECTION Add Bidirection Neighboring Cell Or Not  
SRCCELLNAME Source cell name  
NBRCELLNAME Neighbor cell name  
SRCLTENCELLID Source Cell Index  
NBRLTENCELLID Neighbor Cell Index  
SPTRESEL Support Cell Reselection SUPPORT
SPTBLINDHO Support Blind Handover UNSUPPORT
SPTRAPIDSEL Support Rapid Reselection UNSUPPORT
NCELLPRI Neighboring Cell Priority 255

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 71 of 189


3.2 UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection

3.2.1 Cell Reselection feature configuration and activation


The cell reselection detailed here under is the one where the absolute prorities are defined and broadcasted. There is
also a possibility to have cell reselection when the priorities are not defined, so when they are not broadcasted. In
this case, the priorities are defined and broadcasted towards the UE. Also the HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) is
not in use. According to specifications, HCS shall not be used for inter-frequency and inter-RAT reselection if
absolute priority based cell reselection is used.
Details can be found in 3Gpp TS 25.304 and TS 25.133.

3.2.1.1 Priority Network Configuration

The priorities need to be set for all technologies. The current priorities are listed in 2.3.1. Here below the priority
parameters concerned:
Table 3-51: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - Huawei Priority Parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Absolute Priority Level of the E-UTRA
NPriority UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO
Frequency
SPriority Absolute priority level of the serving cell UCELLSELRESEL

These priorities are broacasted on the SIB19 together with the other parameters.

3.2.1.2 Neigbour definition

No neighbours need to be defined, the UE is informed to scan the EUTRAN frequency.

3.2.2 Measurement criterion

3.2.2.1 RF Conditions (“S” criteria)

When the EUTRAN priority is higher than the one of the UTRAN (serving cell), the EUTRAN frequency will
always been measured.
When the EUTRAN priority is lower than the one of the UTRAN (serving cell), then the following conditions will
be used:

- If SrxlevS > Sprioritysearch1 and SqualS > Sprioritysearch2 the UE may choose not to perform measurements of
inter-RAT layers of lower priority;

- If SrxlevS <= Sprioritysearch1 or SqualS <= Sprioritysearch2 the UE shall perform measurements of inter-RAT
layers of lower priority;

where,
Srxlevs: Qrxlevmeas,s - Qrxlevmin – Pcompensation
Squals = Qqualmeas,s – Qqualmin, Qqualmeas,s is the serving cell Ec/No.

where,

Pcompensation = MAX(UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH – P_MAX, 0).

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 72 of 189


Table 3-52: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - 3Gpp criteria

Parameter Description
Sprioritysearch1 Search threshold for Srxlev
Sprioritysearch2 Search threshold for Squal
Cell Selection quality value (dB)
Squal
Applicable only for FDD cells and E-UTRA cells.
Srxlev Cell Selection RX level value (dB)
Measured cell quality value. The quality of the received signal expressed in CPICH
Qqualmeas Ec/N0 (dB) for FDD cells.
Measured cell RX level value. This is received signal, CPICH RSCP for FDD cells
Qrxlevmeas
(dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB). Applicable only for FDD cells.
Qrxlevmin Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)
Pcompensation max(UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH – P_MAX, 0) (dB)
Maximum TX power level an UE may use when accessing the cell on RACH (read in
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH
system information) (dBm)
P_MAX Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm)

3.2.2.2 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 3-53: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - “S” criteria Huawei Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


RSCP threshold for low-prio-freq
Sprioritysearch1 THDPRIORITYSEARCH1 UCELLSELRESEL
measurement initiation
Ec/No threshold for low-prio-freq
Sprioritysearch2 THDPRIORITYSEARCH2 UCELLSELRESEL
measurement initiation
Qqualmin Qqualmin Min quality level UCELLSELRESEL
Qrxlevmin Qrxlevmin Min Rx level UCELLSELRESEL
UE_TXPWR_MAX MaxAllowedUlTxPower Max allowed UE UL TX power
UCELLSELRESEL
_RACH

3.2.2.3 Huawei current network Parameters

Table 3-54: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - “S” criteria Huawei Parameters curent network values

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
RSCP threshold for low-prio-freq
THDPRIORITYSEARCH1 2 -111 dBm
measurement initiation
Ec/No threshold for low-prio-freq
THDPRIORITYSEARCH2 2 2dB
measurement initiation
Qqualmin Min quality level -18 -18 dB
Qrxlevmin Min Rx level -58 -115 dBm
MaxAllowedUlTxPower Max allowed UE UL TX power 24 24 dBm

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 73 of 189


These values would be in use in case the EUTRAN priority is lower than the UTRAN, it won’t be applicable as the
reselection is based on abslute priorities and the EUTRAN priority is higher than the UTRAN, this means that the
UE will always measure the EUTRAN cells when available.

3.2.2.4 Parameter details

UTRAN to EUTRAN
Reselection Parameters Meas.xlsx

3.2.3 Triggering Conditions


Several criteria sets have been defined in the 3Gpp TS 25.304. Depending whether the priorities are defined and
known by the UE (broadcasted), whether some parameters are broadcasted or not, some criterion might apply or not.
Here below the description of what is done by Huawei (criteria 1 and 3 in 3Gpp for inter-RAT).

3.2.3.1 UTRAN priority is lower than EUTRAN priority (UTRANPRI < EUTRANPRI)

If the Srxlevn of a EUTRAN cell is greater than ThreshHigh during a time interval Treselection.

where,

Srxlevn: Qrxlevmeas,n, Qrxlevmeas,n is the EUTRAN frequency RSRP measured by the UE


ThreshHigh: threshold for the neighbour EUTRAN cell in case of higher priority EUTRAN cell reselection
Treselection: time interval for valid measurement

3.2.3.2 EUTRAN priority is lower than UTRAN priority (UTRANPRI > EUTRANPRI)

All the below conditions need to be fullfilled.

If (Srxlevs < ThreshLows or Squals <= 0) and the Srxlevn of a EUTRAN cell is greater than ThreshLow during a time
interval Treselection.

where,

Srxlevs: Qrxlevmeas,s – Qrxlevmins – Pcompensations, Qrxlevmeas,s is the serving cell RSCP measured by the UE
Srxlevn: Qrxlevmeas,n, Qrxlevmeas,n is the EUTRAN frequency RSRP measured by the UE
ThreshLow: threshold for the neighbour EUTRAN cell in case of lower priority EUTRAN cell reselection
ThreshLows: threshold for the serving cell towards lower priority EUTRAN cell reselection (RSCP)
Squals: Qqualmeas,s – Qqualmins, Qqualmeas,s is the serving cell Ec/No.
Treselection: time interval for valid measurement

Note: the absolute value for the parameters: ThreshLow, and ThreshHigh are relative to the parameter Eqrxlevmin.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 74 of 189


Table 3-55: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - 3Gpp criteria

Parameter Description
Cell Selection quality value (dB)
Squal
Applicable only for FDD cells and E-UTRA cells.
Srxlev Cell Selection RX level value (dB)
Measured cell quality value. The quality of the received signal expressed in
Qqualmeas CPICH Ec/N0 (dB) for FDD cells.
Measured cell RX level value. This is received signal, CPICH RSCP for FDD cells
Qrxlevmeas
(dBm), or RSRP for EUTRAN frequency.
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB). Applicable only for FDD cells.
Qrxlevmin Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)
Pcompensation max(UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH – P_MAX, 0) (dB)
Maximum TX power level an UE may use when accessing the cell on RACH (read
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH
in system information) (dBm)
P_MAX Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm)
Threshold for the serving cell towards lower priority EUTRAN cell reselection
ThreshLows
(RSCP)
Threshold for the neighbour EUTRAN cell in case of lower priority EUTRAN cell
ThreshLow
reselection. Eqrxlevmin is used to calculate the absolute RSRP threshold.
Threshold for the neighbour EUTRAN cell in case of higher priority EUTRAN
ThreshHigh
cell reselection. Eqrxlevmin is used to calculate the absolute RSRP threshold.
Treselection cell reselection timer value

If multiple cells fulfill a set of criterion, the UE performs reselection to the cell with the highest absolute priority. If
multiple cells have the highest absolute priority, the UE performs reselection to the cell with the largest Srxlevn
value.

3.2.3.3 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

Table 3-56: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - triggering criteria Huawei Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


RSCP threshold for low-prio-freq
ThreshLows ThdServingLow UCELLSELRESEL
reselection
ThdToLow RSRP Threshold for Low-prio-freq UCELLNFREQPRI
ThreshLow
Reselection OINFO
RSRP Threshold for High-prio-freq UCELLNFREQPRI
ThreshHigh ThdToHigh
Reselection OINFO
Qqualmin Qqualmin Min quality level UCELLSELRESEL
Qrxlevmin Qrxlevmin Min Rx level UCELLSELRESEL
UE_TXPWR_MAX MaxAllowedUlTxPower Max allowed UE UL TX power
UCELLSELRESEL
_RACH
Treselection Treselections Reselection delay time UCELLSELRESEL

3.2.3.4 Huawei current network Parameters

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 75 of 189


Table 3-57: UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection - triggering criterion Huawei Parameters curent network values

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
RSCP threshold for low-prio-freq
ThdServingLow 1 -113 dBm
reselection
ThdToLow RSRP Threshold for Low-prio-freq
2 -124 dBm
Reselection
RSRP Threshold for High-prio-freq
ThdToHigh 8 -112 dBm
Reselection
Minimum Required RSRP
EQrxlevmin -64 -128 dBm
Threshold of the E-UTRA Cell
Qqualmin Min quality level -18 -18 dB
Qrxlevmin Min Rx level -58 -115 dBm
MaxAllowedUlTxPower Max allowed UE UL TX power 24 24 dBm
Treselections Reselection delay time 1 1s

3.2.3.5 Parameter details

UTRAN to EUTRAN
Reselection Parameters Trigg.xlsx

3.2.3.6 Other parameters to consider


There are a few other parameters that need to be setup as well, like the EUTRAN frequency to use. There are also
parameters related to HCS, which is not used. There is also a possibility to blacklist some cells. These parameter are
skipped here, as they are not relevant. Refer to the documentation and the 3Gpp specifications for futher
information.

Table 3-58: : UMTS to LTE Cell Reselection – Other parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel
EARFCN UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO
Number
EMeasBW Measurement Bandwidth UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO
EDetectInd E-UTRA Monitoring Indication UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO

Parameter details:

UTRAN to EUTRAN
Reselection Parameters Trigg other.xlsx

3.2.4 Fast return to LTE (Fast LTE Reselection at 3G CS call release)

3.2.4.1 Feature Principle

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 76 of 189


This feature is similar than the one for 2G. The idea is to have the UE coming back to LTE earlier, without going
through the reselection process when a CS call is released. Thi is especially usefull as the CS calls are redirected to
other technologies like UMTS through the CS fallback (see further in this document). The UE must be compliant
with 3Gpp Release 9 or later. The RNC will add the necessary information in the RRC connection release, like the
EUTRAN frequency to reselect to. The absolute priorities need to be defined, as only the frequencies of the higher
priority cells will be provided. The UMTS to LTE neighbour links must be defined, in tables ULTECELL and
ULTENCELL. The UE will attempt to camp on such cell following these criterion:

RRC Connection Release


Contains LTE suitable « n »
Frequencies

No
Find another LTE Suitable
Found LTE Cell?
Frequency

Yes

No

No
LTE Cell fullfil Cell selection
criteria (« S ») Time Elapse?
Srxlev and Squal

Yes
Yes

Reselect suitable LTE cell and


Randomly camp on a cell
camp on it

Notes:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 77 of 189


- In case of existing Iur interface, the frequencies from the DRNC cells with higher or lower priorities
than the UTRAN will also be indicated in the message;
- Some target cells can be blacklisted;
- This feature is recommended for areas with good LTE coverage;
- When an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message contains information about n LTE frequencies
whose signal quality is poor:
 UEs complying with a version earlier than 3GPP Release 10 select a suitable LTE cell from
the LTE cells using n LTE frequencies. The selection lasts for at least 10 seconds. If no
suitable LTE cell is found, these UEs select a suitable LTE cell from the LTE cells using
frequencies supported by these UEs. If a suitable LTE cell is still not found, these UEs
randomly camp on a suitable cell. (For details about suitable cell selection, see 3GPP TS
25.331. For details about a suitable cell, see 3GPP TS 23.122.)
 UEs complying with 3GPP Release 10 or later select a suitable LTE cell from the LTE cells
using n LTE frequencies. The selection lasts for at least n seconds. If no suitable LTE cell is
found, these UEs select a suitable LTE cell from the LTE cells using frequencies supported by
these UEs. The selection lasts for 4 seconds. If a suitable LTE cell is still not found, these UEs
randomly camp on a suitable cell.

3.2.4.2 Feature Activation

3.2.4.2.1 Priorities

The absolute priorities need to be defined, here below the respective parameters to set, these are the same as for the
UMTS to LTE reselection:

Table 3-59: Fast Return to LTE – Absolute Priorities

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Absolute Priority Level of the E-UTRA
NPriority UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO
Frequency
SPriority Absolute priority level of the serving cell UCELLSELRESEL

3.2.4.2.2 Neighbour link definition

In order to have this feature operational, the neighbour links between UMTS and LTE need to be defined. Therefore,
the following parameters in the tables ULTECELL and ULTENCELL need to be defined.

Table 3-60: Fast Return to LTE – NB frequenccy parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


LTEArfcn LTE Cell Downlink Frequency ULTECELL
LTEBand LTE Cell Frequency Band ULTECELL

In the ULTENCELL, only the neighbours are defined with their respective RNCID, CELLID and LTECELLINDEX
refering to the neighbours defined in the table ULTECELL.

3.2.4.2.3 Feature activation

To effectivelly activate the feature, once the priorities and neighbour respective parameters have been defined, the
parameter: HO_UMTS_TO_LTE_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH under the HOSwitch parameter in the table
UCORRMALGOSWITCH must be switched on.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 78 of 189


3.2.4.2.4 Current network setting

This feature is currently not in use.

3.2.4.2.5 Parameter details

Fast UMTS to LTE


Reselection.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 79 of 189


4 Redirection

Refer to cell selection, CS fallback and handover chapter.

Redirection is a method of transferring UEs between cells and is a type of handover when "handover" is used as a
generic term. When a handover cannot be performed in an emergency or due to equipment limitations, the eNodeB
sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message, which contains information about a neighboring frequency in
the LTE system or in another RAT system. Using this message, the eNodeB instructs the UE to initiate a random
access procedure towards an inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cell so that the UE can resume its services.
Compared with handovers, redirections do not include a procedure for initiating a handover request towards a
neighboring cell and therefore have lower requirements for equipment capabilities and can be rapidly performed.
The two methods differ in the way to transfer UEs.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 80 of 189


5 CS Fallback

5.1 Introduction

The CS Fallback (CSFB) consists of moving the UE away from the EUTRAN network in order to start a voice call
on a mobile network with circuit switched (CS) core network. Indeed, LTE do not have CS core network, for voice
call, only voice over IP is supported (VoIP), IMS network is required for VoIP. VoIP is not part of this document. In
order to have CSFB working, there should be a link between the MME (LTE PS core network) and the MSC (GSM
and UMTS CS core network). This interface is called SGs.

The CSFB are described in 3Gpp TS 23.272.

In eRAN6, there are several features for CSFB (towards GERAN and UTRAN):

- LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN enhanced, introduced in eRAN 2.1;


- LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN enhanced, introduced in eRAN 2.1;
- LOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN enhanced, introduced in eRAN 3.0;
- LOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN enhanced, introduced in eRAN 3.0;
- LOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN, introduced in eRAN 3.0;
- LOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN, introduced in eRAN 3.0;
- LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering, introduced in eRAN 3.0;
- LOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN, introduced in eRAN 6.0;
- LOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN, introduced in eRAN 6.0.

The two first features (LOFD-001033 and LOFD-001034)  are the ones currently in use, the ones explained here
below, and require 3Gpp Rel. 8. There are two options, using the PS-HO or the redirection. The following two,
LOFD-001052  and LOFD-001053 require 3Gpp Rel.9 on both the network and UE sides. They use the principle of
RIM (RAN Information Management), in that case a specific cell can be refferred in the messaging, instead of only
the frequency. The two next features are usefull in case of different PLMN, or different LAC. The last three features
are used in case a specific network strategy in terms of HO policies for CS and PS, also in case of load balance
requirement,...

5.2 CSFB Mechanisms

5.2.1 Towards UTRAN mechanisms

Based on the capabilities of UEs and network, the following mechanisms are available for an
eNodeB to perform CSFB to UTRAN:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 81 of 189


CSFB based on PS handover
CSFB based on PS redirection
Flash CSFB

Table 5-61: CSFB Towards UTRAN Mechanisms

Fallback Impact on the CS Service Access PS Service


Impact on the UEs
Mechanism Network Delay Interruption Time

PS Handover Complex Complex Short Short


PS Redirection Simple Simple Long Long
Flash Medium Medium Short Medium

5.2.2 Towards GERAN mechanisms

Based on the capabilities of UEs and network, the following mechanisms are available for an
eNodeB to perform CSFB to GERAN:

 CSFB based on PS redirection


 CSFB based on PS handover
 CSFB based on CCO/NACC
 Flash CSFB

Table 5-62: CSFB Towards GERAN Mechanisms

Fallback Impact on the CS Service Access PS Service


Impact on the UEs
Mechanism Network Delay Interruption Time
PS Redirection Simple Simple Long Long
PS Handover Complex Complex Short Sort
CCO/NACC Medium Medium Medium Medium
Flash Medium Medium Short Medium

CCO: Cell Change Order, NACC: Network Assisted Cell Change.

5.3 CSFB Basics

The features LOFD-001033 and LOFD-001034 are explained here below, these are the most popular ones, and the
ones currently in use. These features are using the mechanisms listed here above, except the one called “Flash”.

Here below the process followed by the eNodeB to perform a CSFB. There are basicaly 4 main phases:

- CSFB triggering;
- CSFB measurement;
- CSFB decision;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 82 of 189


- CSFB execution.

Figure 5-14: CSFB - Basic Process

5.4 CSFB Triggering Phase

5.4.1 Description

After receiving a CS Fallback Indicator from the MME, the eNodeB decides whether to
perform CSFB in the form of a blind handling procedure based on the UE capabilities and
the setting of the blind handover switch on the eNodeB. Compared with measurement based
handovers, blind handling procedures have shorter access delays but a lower
handover success rate.
During this phase, the system must know if it has to trigger a blind handover, or a measurement handover.

After receiving the CS Fallback Indicator, the eNodeB checks the blind-handover switch setting
and UE capabilities for each RAT and performs accordingly:

 If the BlindHoSwitch option under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter is


cleared, blind handovers are prohibited. Under this condition, if the UE is capable of
measuring a RAT, the eNodeB delivers the inter-RAT measurement configuration to the
UE, instructing the UE to perform measurements on this RAT.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 83 of 189


 If the BlindHoSwitch option under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter is
cleared and the UE is incapable of measuring a RAT, the eNodeB performs CSFB in the
form of a blind redirection.
 If the BlindHoSwitch option under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter is
selected, blind handovers are allowed and the eNodeB directly performs CSFB in the form
of a blind handling procedure.

If the PS handover switch is turned on, it is recommended that the blind handover switch be
turned off to increase the CSFB success rate. The UtranPsHoSwitch and GeranPsHoSwitch
options under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter specify whether to enable PS
handover to UTRAN and GERAN, respectively.

Figure 5-15: CSFB Triggering phase - selecting frequencies to measure or selecting a target cell

5.4.2 CSFB Triggering Parameters

Table 5-63: CSFB triggering phase - parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


HoAlgoSwitch Handover Algo switch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
InterRatHighestPri Highest priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 84 of 189


InterRatSecondPri Second priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
InterRatLowestPri Lowest priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg

Note: in case the neighbour relations are defined with their respective parameters, these are not listed here, but these
need to be taken into account. It is currently the case for the GERAN, but not for the UTRAN (same as for the
reselection). The eNodeB can deliver a maximum of 3 UTRAN absolute radio frequency channel numbers
(UARFCNs) or 32 GERAN absolute radio frequency channel numbers (ARFCNs) at a time.

5.5 CSFB Measurement Phase

5.5.1 Description

CSFB is triggered by event B1, which is reported in event-triggered periodical reporting mode.

The triggering of event B1 indicates that the signal quality is higher than a specified threshold
in at least one neighboring cell. As defined in 3GPP TS 36.331, the entering and leaving conditions of event B1 are
as follows:

Mn + Ofn - Hys > Thresh (entering condition)

Mn + Ofn + Hys < Thresh (leaving condition)

where,

Mn: is the measurement result of the inter-RAT neighbour cell, not taking into account any offsets (dB or dBm);

Ofn: is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbou (dB)r;

Hys: is the hysteresis parameter (dB);

Thresh: is the threshold parameter (dB or dBm);

The following parameters related to event B1 for CSFB are the same as those related to event B1 for inter-RAT
handovers:

 Frequency-specific offset for the frequency of the neighboring cell;


 Hysteresis;
 Reporting interval;
 Maximum number of cells contained in one report;
 Number of periodic reports.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 85 of 189


Figure 5-16: CSFB - Event B1

Note:
Ms: is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.

5.5.2 3Gpp vs Huawei parameters

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 86 of 189


Table 5-64: CSFB measurement phase - 3Gpp vs Huawei Parameters

3Gpp Name Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


Thresh CSFB UTRAN EventB1 RSCP
CsfbHoUtranB1ThdRscp CSFallBackHo
(UTRAN) Trigger Threshold
Thresh CSFB UTRAN EventB1 ECN0
CsfbHoUtranB1ThdEcn0 Trigger Threshold
CSFallBackHo
(UTRAN)
Thresh CSFB GERAN EventB1
CsfbHoGeranB1Thd CSFallBackHo
(GERAN) Trigger Threshold
InterRatHoUtranGro
Hys (UTRAN) InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst UTRAN handover hysteresis
up
InterRatHoGeranGro
Hys (GERAN) InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst GERAN handover hysteresis
up
Ofn (UTRAN) OffsetFreq Frequency offset UtranNFreq
Ofn (GERAN) OffsetFreq Frequency offset GeranNfreqGroup
Time to
CSFB Utran EventB1 Time To
Trigger CsfbHoUtranTimeToTrig CSFallBackHo
Trig
(UTRAN)
Time to
CSFB Geran EventB1 Time To
Trigger CsfbHoGeranTimeToTrig CSFallBackHo
Trig
(GERAN)
Utran measurement trigger
InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuan InterRatHoComm
quantity
Report interval UTRAN FDD measurement
InterRATHoUtranRprtInterval InterRatHoComm
(UTRAN) report interval
Report interval Geran measurement report
InterRATHoGeranRprtInterval InterRatHoComm
(GERAN) interval

Note:
- the parameter InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuan is only used for 3Gpp Rel. 10 and further, currently it
is using both RSCP and Ec/No (set to both by default);
- it is not clear if the hysteresis parameters are used for CSFB B1 event, but it can be expected so, to
avoid ping-pong.

5.5.3 Current network parameters

These parameters have the same value for L800 and L1800.

Current
Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values
Values
HoModeSwitch Handover Mode switch EutranVoipCapSwitch-0 inactive
&UtranVoipCapSwitch-0
&GeranVoipCapSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttVoipCapSwitch-0
&UtranPsHoSwitch-0 &GeranPsHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdNonOtpimisedHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdOptimisedHoSwitch-0
&GeranNaccSwitch-0 &GeranCcoSwitch-0
&UtranSrvccSwitch-0 &GeranSrvccSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttSrvccSwitch-0
&UtranRedirectSwitch-1
&GeranRedirectSwitch-1
&CdmaHrpdRedirectSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttRedirectSwitch-0

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 87 of 189


&BlindHoSwitch-0
CSFB UTRAN EventB1 RSCP
CsfbHoUtranB1ThdRscp -97 -97dBm
Trigger Threshold
CSFB UTRAN EventB1 ECN0
CsfbHoUtranB1ThdEcn0 -13 -13dB
Trigger Threshold
CSFB GERAN EventB1 Trigger -
CsfbHoGeranB1Thd -103
Threshold 103dBm
InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst UTRAN handover hysteresis 2 1dB
InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst GERAN handover hysteresis 2 1dB
OffsetFreq (UTRAN) Frequency offset 0 0dB
OffsetFreq (GERAN) Frequency offset 0 0dB
CSFB Utran EventB1 Time To
CsfbHoUtranTimeToTrig 40ms 40ms
Trig
CSFB Geran EventB1 Time To
CsfbHoGeranTimeToTrig 40ms 40ms
Trig
InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQua Utran measurement trigger
n quantity
UTRAN FDD measurement report
InterRATHoUtranRprtInterval
interval
Geran measurement report
InterRATHoGeranRprtInterval
interval

Note: several parameters are introduced in eRAN6, so there are no current network values for all parameters (current
network is eRAN3). No value means that the parameter is introduced in eRAN6, they are also writen in italic.

5.6 CSFB Decision Phase

5.6.1 Description

The eNodeB analyses the measurements and select the suitable cells (in case of HO) and / or select the suitabletarget
cell .

5.7 CSFB Execution Phase

5.7.1 Description

The eNodeB executes the CSFB and the UE moves towards the target cell. Currently, only the redirection based
CSFB is followed.

Note: prior the Ericsson core, the handover way was used.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 88 of 189


5.7.1.1 Execution towards a GERAN cell

Figure 5-17: CSFB Execution phase - Procedure for executing CSFB to GERAN

5.7.1.2 Execution towards a GERAN cell

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 89 of 189


Figure 5-18: CSFB Execution phase - Procedure for executing CSFB to UTRAN

5.7.2 Parameters

Table 5-65: CSFB execution phase - parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 90 of 189


CsfbHoPolicyCfg CSFB handover policy Configuration CSFallBackPolicyCfg

5.8 Other parameters

5.8.1 CSFB Huawei other parameters

Table 5-66: CSFB – Other parameters

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


HoAlgoSwitch Handover Algo switch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
FreqLayerSwtich Frequency Layer Switch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
RimSwitch RIM switch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
CsfbHoPolicyCfg CSFB handover policy Configuration CSFallBackPolicyCfg
CnOperatorId CN Operator ID CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
InterRatHighestPri Highest priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
InterRatSecondPri Second priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
InterRatLowestPri Lowest priority InterRat CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
UtranLcsCap UTRAN LCS capability CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
GeranLcsCap GERAN LCS capability CSFallBackBlindHoCfg
CsfbProtectionTimer CSFB Protection Timer CSFallBackHo
TarMcc Target Mobile country code InterPlmnHoList
TarMnc Target Mobile network code InterPlmnHoList
NoHoFlag No handover flag InterRatPolicyCfgGroup
GapPatternType GAP measurement pattern HoMeasComm
GeranFilterCoeff GERAN filter coefficient HoMeasComm
UtranFilterCoeffRscp UTRAN RSCP filter coefficient HoMeasComm
UtranFilterCoeffEcn0 UTRAN ECN0 filter coefficient HoMeasComm
GeranCellNumForEmcRedirec Max Geran cell num in CSFB EMC InterRatHoComm
t redirection
Max Utran cell num in CSFB EMC InterRatHoComm
UtranCellNumForEmcRedirect
redirection
Rac Routing area code GeranExternalCell
BlindHoPriority Blind handover priority GeranNcell
OffsetFreq Frequency offset GeranNfreqGroup
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority GeranNfreqGroup
CellMeasPriority Cell Measure Priority UtranNCell
OffsetFreq Frequency offset UtranNFreq
CsPriority CS service priority UtranNFreq
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority UtranNFreq
CsPsMixedPriority CS and PS mixed priority UtranNFreq
Rac Routing area code UtranExternalCell

Note: HoAlgoSwitch is a general HO parameters, where several HO types are set or unset, refer to the parameter
details file for further information.

5.8.2 Current Network Huawei other parameters

These parameters have the same value for L800 and L1800.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 91 of 189


Note: several parameters are introduced in eRAN6, so there are no current network values for all parameters (current
network is eRAN3). No value means that the parameter is introduced in eRAN6, they are also writen in italic. Also,
so parameters are cell/area dependent, like the RAC, so the value can be anything in the range, they are not listed
here below.

Table 5-67: CSFB – Other parameters values

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Current GUI Values Current Values
IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&InterFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&UtranCsfbSwitch-1
&GeranCsfbSwitch-1
&Cdma1xRttCsfbSwitch-0
&UtranServiceHoSwitch-0
&GeranServiceHoSwitch-0
UTRAN and
&CdmaHrpdServiceHoSwitch-0
HoAlgoSwitch Handover Algo switch GERAN CSFB
&Cdma1xRttServiceHoSwitch-0
are active
&UlQualityInterRATHoSwitch-0
&InterPlmnHoSwitch-0
&UtranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&GeranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&ServiceBasedInterFreqHoSwitch
-0
&UlQualityInterFreqHoSwitch-0
UtranFreqLayerMeasSwitch-0
FreqLayerSwtich Frequency Layer Switch inactive
&UtranFreqLayerBlindSwitch-0
UTRAN_RIM_SWITCH-0
RimSwitch RIM switch RIM inactive
&GERAN_RIM_SWITCH-0
CSFB handover policy
CsfbHoPolicyCfg
Configuration
CnOperatorId CN Operator ID 0 0
InterRatHighestPri Highest priority InterRat GERAN GERAN
InterRatSecondPri Second priority InterRat UTRAN UTRAN
InterRatLowestPri Lowest priority InterRat CDMA2000 CDMA2000
UtranLcsCap UTRAN LCS capability OFF OFF
GeranLcsCap GERAN LCS capability OFF OFF
CsfbProtectionTimer CSFB Protection Timer
NoHoFlag No handover flag Permit HO Permit HO
GAP_PATTER
GapPatternType GAP measurement pattern GAP_PATTERN_TYPE_1 N
_TYPE_1
GeranFilterCoeff GERAN filter coefficient FC6 FC6
UTRAN RSCP filter
UtranFilterCoeffRscp FC6 FC6
coefficient
UTRAN ECN0 filter
UtranFilterCoeffEcn0 FC6 FC6
coefficient
GeranCellNumForEmcRedire Max Geran cell num in
ct CSFB EMC redirection
UtranCellNumForEmcRedire Max Utran cell num in
ct CSFB EMC redirection
BlindHoPriority Blind handover priority 0 or 1(*) 0 = not allowed
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 92 of 189


CellMeasPriority Cell Measure Priority
CsPriority CS service priority HIGH_PRIORITY
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority
CsPsMixedPriority CS and PS mixed priority

Notes:
(*) Regarding the parameter “BlindHOPriority”, only one neighbour can be defined as target, usually it is the co-
located cell, if there is no co-located cell, another can be defined, the most probable one. Although the system send
all neighbour information.

5.9 Parameter details

All concerned parameters are listed here in details, inclusive the ones used for other features listed here, although
not in use, or explained here above.

CSFB eRAN6
parameters.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 93 of 189


6 Handover

6.1 Technical Overview and Basic Concepts

6.1.1 Handover overview (mobility generalities)

This chapter provides a description of mobility in connected mode, idle mode was described in previous chapter,
mainly in the cell reselection chapter. The mobility in connected mode follows a process through handover (HO). It
guarantees the continuity of the service while the UE is moving accross the network. It concerns only data (PS)
service since voice is moved to other thechnologies (refre to the CS fall back in previous chapter).
Handovers can be classified by handover target and by causes as follows: intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-
RAT, but also load based, coverage based,…as it can be seen here under:

Figure 6-19: Handover – EUTRAN mobility global picture

Clasified by target:

- Intra-frequency;
- Inter-frequency;
- Inter-RAT.

Clasified by causes:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 94 of 189


- Coverage-based handover ;
- Load-based handover ;
- Service-based handover ;
- Distance-based handover ;
- UL-quality-based handover ;
- Frequency-priority-based handover.

Only coverage based are currently used, only this part will be explained here under.

6.1.2 Achitecture summary for mobility in EUTRAN

The figure here under is a summary of the elements involved in the PS mobility for EUTRAN.

Figure 6-20: Handover – architecture summary for mobility in EUTRAN

6.1.3 Measurement for a Handover

After a UE establishes a radio bearer, the eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration to the UE in an RRC
Connection Reconfiguration message. The measurement configuration consists of measurement objects, reporting
configurations, and other parameters.

6.1.3.1 Measurement Objects

Measurement objects are the objects that UEs measure. Measurement object information includes the target system
and target frequency for a UE to measure, as well as the measurement bandwidth, frequency-specific offset, and
target cell.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 95 of 189


6.1.3.1.1 Target System

The eNodeB delivers only information about the target systems that the UE is capable of measuring. The target
systems vary as follows:
- For the measurement of the serving cell or an intra-frequency neighboring cell, the target
system is EUTRAN;
- For an inter-frequency measurement, the target system is EUTRAN;
- For an inter-RAT measurement, the eNodeB determines the target system based on the UE
measurement capability, as described in the following sections.

6.1.3.1.2 Target Frequency

The eNodeB determines target frequencies based on a list of neighboring cells in the selected target system.
The eNodeB determines the target frequencies based on a neighboring cell list that excludes the following cells:
- Blacklisted neighboring cells;
- Neighboring cells that have a different PLMN from the serving cell if the inter-PLMN
handover switch is turned off (this is usually the case);
- Neighboring cells with a handover prohibition flag;
- Neighboring cells in the areas indicated by the information element (IE) Handover Restriction List in
the INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message sent from the MME.

If the number of configured target frequencies exceeds the protocol-specified limit, the eNodeB selects and delivers
frequencies with higher priorities. If the number of high-priority target frequencies still exceeds the limit and
multiple high-priority frequencies are configured with the same priority, the eNodeB randomly selects some of these
frequencies.

- The priority of an EUTRAN frequency is specified by the EutranInterNFreq.ConnFreqPriority


parameter;
- The priority of a UTRAN frequency is specified by the UtranNFreq.ConnFreqPriority parameter;
- The priority of a GERAN frequency is specified by the GeranNfreqGroup.ConnFreqPriority
parameter.

If the number of GERAN frequencies to be delivered exceeds the protocol-specified limit, the eNodeB may not
deliver GERAN frequencies that have low priorities. Therefore, if a large number of GERAN frequencies are to be
delivered, add these frequencies to a GERAN frequency group with a high priority, that is, a GERAN frequency
group with a large value of GeranNfreqGroup.ConnFreqPriority before configuring them.
These parameters are eRAN6, so there are no current values in the network.

Table 6-68: Handover – Target Frequency Priorities parameters

Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table
Values Values
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority EutranInterNFreq
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority UtranNFreq
ConnFreqPriority Connect frequency priority GeranNfreqGroup

Parameter details:

Target Frequency
Priority.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 96 of 189


6.1.3.1.3 Measurement Bandwidth and Frequency specific Offset

If the target system is E-UTRAN, information about a measurement object also includes:

- Measurement bandwidth
The measurement bandwidth is the cell bandwidth of which the UE performs
measurements. If the measurement bandwidth of the serving cell or intra-frequency
neighboring cells is not specified (CELLRESEL.MeasBandWidthCfgInd is set to
NOT_CFG), the eNodeB includes the downlink (DL) bandwidth (specified by the
CELL.DlBandWidth parameter) of the serving cell in the measurement configuration by
default and delivers the information to the UE.

- Frequency-specific offset
The frequency-specific offset is included in the measurement object information because
it is set for each frequency. This offset adjusts the probability of triggering a handover to
a specific frequency.

For details about parameters for EUTRAN measurement configurations, refer to the intra-frequency
measurement and inter-frequency measurement parameters here further in this chapter.

Table 6-69: Handover – Measurement bandwidth and offset parameters

Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table
Values Values
Measurement bandwidth NOT_CFG Not Active
MeasBandWidthCfgInd CELLRESEL
configure indicator
Using the
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth CELLRESEL serving cell
bandwidth
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset CELL dB0 0 dB
1545 (L1800) or 1545 (L1800)
DlEarfcn Downlink EARFCN CELL 6400 (L800) or 6400
(L800)

Note: these parameters are also listed in the reselection chapter 2 (2.3.2.7.2).

6.1.3.1.4 Target Cell

According to 3GPP specifications, if the target system is EUTRAN or UTRAN, the measurement configuration can
include information about the candidate target cells. Please refer to 3Gpp TS 36.331.
If the target system is EUTRAN, the eNodeB delivers information about a candidate target cell only if the cell
individual offset (CIO) of the cell is not 0 dB.

6.1.3.2 Reporting Configuration


The following concept is quite important in the mobility. This will be detailed in the coming sections. Here below a
summary.

6.1.3.2.1 Event Triggered Reporting


The concept of event-triggered reporting as specified in section 5.5 in 3GPP TS 36.331 is used by the handover
measurement and decision phases. Reporting configurations consist of the parameters related to specific events.
Currently, the eNodeB supports mechanisms as responses to the following events:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 97 of 189


- Event A1 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is higher than a specified threshold. When
the information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is reported, the eNodeB stops inter-
frequency or inter-RAT measurements. However, in frequency-priority-based inter-frequency
handovers, event A1 is used to start interfrequency measurements.

- Event A2 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold. When
the information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is reported, the eNodeB starts inter-
frequency or inter-RAT measurements. However, in frequency-priority-based inter-frequency
handovers, event A2 is used to stop interfrequency measurements.

- Event A3 indicates that the signal quality in at least one intra-frequency or inter-frequency neighboring
cell is higher than that in the serving cell by an offset. When the information about the cells that meet
the triggering condition is reported, the source eNodeB sends an intra-frequency or inter-frequency
handover request.

- Event A4 indicates that the signal quality is higher than a specified threshold in at least one inter-
frequency neighboring cell. When the information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is
reported, the source eNodeB sends an inter-frequency handover request.

- Event A5 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a threshold and that the
signal quality in at least one inter-frequency neighboring cell is higher than another threshold. When
the information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is reported, the source eNodeB sends
an inter-frequency handover request.

- Event A6 (since 3Gpp Rel. 10), is in use with carrier aggregation. It indicates that the signal quality in
at least one intra-frequency secondary cell is higher than that in the serving cell by an offset.

- Event B1 indicates that the signal quality is higher than a specified threshold in at least one inter-RAT
neighboring cell. When the information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is reported,
the source eNodeB sends an inter-RAT handover request.

- Event B2 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a threshold and that the
signal quality in at least one inter-RAT neighboring cell is higher than another threshold. When the
information about the cells that meet the triggering condition is reported, the source eNodeB sends an
inter-RAT handover request.

Each event may have different sets of the threshold and other event-associated parameters, with each set of the
parameters mapped to a QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The QCI is not in use, and is not part of this document.
The UE reports measurement results in event-triggered periodical mode, which is described in the next section.

6.1.3.2.2 Event Triggered Periodical Reporting

After an event is reported for the first time, the measurement results associated with the event are reported
periodically. This reporting mode is called event-triggered periodical reporting. The UE sends the measurement
results to the eNodeB in event-triggered periodical reporting mode.
The periodical reporting is stopped when the leaving condition is met or after the UE receives a handover command.

Event-triggered periodical reporting has the following benefits:

- Reduces the impact of loss of measurement reports or failures in internal processing on handovers.
- Enables retries of access in case of admission rejection.
- Provides complete measurement results by updating cell information in periodical reports, since a
single measurement report may not contain information about all neighboring cells that meet an event
triggering condition and neighboring cells meeting the condition may change with UE movement.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 98 of 189


6.1.3.2.3 Hysteresis and Time-to-Trigger

Hysteresis and time-to-trigger are key parameters for the UE to decide whether to report an event. These parameters
directly affect handover performance of the system. The two parameter types are set in the measurement
configuration for the associated events.
To reduce the number of event reports generated because of radio signal fluctuation, the hysteresis to the signal
quality is used in the entering and leaving conditions for each event. The hysteresis setting affects the triggering of
the corresponding event. A larger value of the hysteresis results in a lower probability of event triggering, affecting
the user experience. A smaller value of the hysteresis results in a higher probability of event triggering, but it also
leads to a higher probability of incorrect handover decisions and ping-pong handovers.

When the entering condition of an event is met, the UE does not report the cell measurement result associated with
the event to the eNodeB until the entering condition is met throughout a specified period, as defined by the time-to-
trigger parameter. This prevents unnecessary handovers. Time-to-trigger is set for each event, significantly reducing
the average number of handovers and the number of incorrect handovers. Also, these related parameters are decribed
in details in the coming sections.

6.1.3.2.4 Triggering Quantity and Reporting Quantity

The quantities Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) and Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) are used
to measure the E-UTRAN cell quality. Based on the RSRP, the RSRQ takes interference into consideration. The
triggering quantities and reporting quantities for events are configurable. The options are RSRP, RSRQ, or both.
Based on the triggering quantities specified by the eNodeB, the UE performs event evaluation. When the
corresponding signal quality in cells meets the triggering condition for a specific event, the UE reports the
information about the cells to the eNodeB.

6.1.3.3 Other parameters

6.1.3.3.1 Filtering
Before evaluating the reporting criteria and sending measurement reports, the UE performs layer 1 (L1) filtering and
L3 filtering on the measurement results. The L1 filtering is performed by the UE at the physical layer to eliminate
the impact of fast fading on the measurement results.
No user configuration is required for the L1 filtering. The L3 filtering aims at eliminating the impact of shadow
fading and certain fast fading. In this way, better measurement data is provided for the evaluation of the reporting
criteria. Based on the triggering quantity, two L3 filtering coefficients are applicable: one for RSRP measurements
and the other for RSRQ measurements.
The UE performs L1 filtering, L3 filtering, and evaluation of reporting criteria according to the model shown in the
figure here below.

Figure 6-21: Handover – L3 Filtering

The measurement points shown in the figure here above are described as follows:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 99 of 189


- A is the measurement value at the physical layer.
- B is the measurement value obtained after L1 filtering. It will be provided for the higher layers.
- C is the measurement value obtained after L3 filtering.
- C' is other measurement values, such as the Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR)
and the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). These values are measured in the same way as
C, except that no L3 filtering is applied to them.
- D is measurement report information sent from the UE to the eNodeB.
- Parameters (a) include the filtering coefficient for L3 filtering, and parameters (b) include the reporting
configuration.
-
According to 3GPP TS 36.331, before evaluating the reporting criteria and sending measurement reports, the UE
performs L3 filtering on the measurement result by using the following formula:

Fn = (1 - a) x Fn-1 + a x Mn

Where,
- Mn is the nth measurement value received from the physical layer. The interval at which
measurement values are received at the physical layer is subject to UE implementation.
The details are not provided in this document.
- Fn-1 is the (n - 1)th filtered measurement value.
- Fn is the nth filtered measurement value.

- a = 1/2(k/4). It is a weighting factor for the current measurement quantity. In the formula,
k is the L3 filtering coefficient. If k is set to 0 (that is, a = 1), L3 filtering is not applicable.

The L3 filtering coefficient k for different networks is specified by different parameters. The
details are as follows:

- The L3 filtering coefficients for the E-UTRAN are specified by the


HoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRP and HoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRQ parameters.
- The L3 filtering coefficients for the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) are
specified by the HoMeasComm.UtranFilterCoeffRSCP and HoMeasComm.UtranFilterCoeffECN0
parameters.
- The L3 filtering coefficient for the GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) is specified by the
HoMeasComm.GeranFilterCoeff parameter.
-
A larger value of the filtering coefficient indicates a greater smoothing effect and a higher antifading capability, but
also a lower capability of tracing signal fluctuation.

Table 6-70: Handover – L3 Filtering parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
EUTRAN RSRP filter
EutranFilterCoeffRSRP HOMEASCOMM
coefficient
EUTRAN RSRQ filter
EutranFilterCoeffRSRQ HOMEASCOMM
coefficient
UTRAN RSCP filter
UtranFilterCoeffRSCP HOMEASCOMM
coefficient
UTRAN ECN0 filter
UtranFilterCoeffECN0 HOMEASCOMM
coefficient
GERAN filter
GeranFilterCoeff HOMEASCOMM
coefficient

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 100 of 189


Table 6-71: Handover – L3 Filtering parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
EutranFilterCoeffRSR EUTRAN RSRP filter
FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
P coefficient
EutranFilterCoeffRSR EUTRAN RSRQ filter
FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
Q coefficient
UtranFilterCoeffRSCP UTRAN RSCP filter coefficient FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
UtranFilterCoeffECN0 UTRAN ECN0 filter coefficient FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
GeranFilterCoeff GERAN filter coefficient FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6

6.1.3.3.2 Measurement Gap

A measurement gap is a time period during which the UE performs measurements on a neighboring frequency of the
serving frequency. Measurement gaps are applicable to inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. In most cases,
each UE has only one receiver, and consequently each UE can receive the signals on only one frequency at a time.
The Gaps start during SFN (System Frame Number) and subframes defined by:

SFN mod (MGRP/10) = FLOOR (GapOffset/10, 1)


Subframe = GapOffset mod 10

Where,

MGRP is the Measurement Gap Repetition Period it equals 40 ms for gap pattern identity 0 and 80 ms for gap
pattern identity 1. The measurement gap for both pattern identity 0 and 1 is 6 ms.
GapOffset is a configurable value between 0 and 39 for the pattern identy 0, and 0 to 79 for the pattern identity 1.

For example: when the gap identity 0 is configured with a GapOffset of 12, then the measurement gaps start during
subframe 2 of SFN 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21,…

The eNodeB specifies the time period for a UE to perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement by sending
measurement gap configurations to the UE. If the AutoGapSwitch option is selected under the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter, the eNodeB does not send measurement gap configurations to UEs
that support autonomous gaps. For details about measurement gaps, refer to 3GPP TS 36.300 Rel.10.
After receiving a measurement gap configuration, the UE starts gap-assisted measurements accordingly. As shown
in her below, Tperiod denotes the repetition period for measurement gaps, and TGAP denotes the gap width, within
which the UE performs measurements.
When gap-assisted measurements for various handover types co-exist, the eNodeB records the measurements based
on these handover types. Different gap-assisted measurements can share the same measurement gap configuration.
A UE releases measurement gaps only after all gap assisted measurements are completed.
Two measurement gap patterns are available: pattern 1 and pattern 2. In pattern 1, TGAP is 6 ms and Tperiod is 40
ms. In pattern 2, TGAP is 6 ms and Tperiod is 80 ms. The pattern to use is specified by the
HoMeasComm.GapPatternType parameter.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 101 of 189


Figure 6-22: Handover – Measurement GAP

Table 6-72: Handover – Measurement Gap Pattern parameter

Huawei Parameter Current GUI


Huawei Parameter ID Table Current Values
Name Values
GAP measurement GAP_PATTERN_ GAP_PATTERN
GapPatternType HOMEASCOMM
pattern TYPE_1 _TYPE_1

6.1.3.3.3 Cell Individual Offset (CIO)

Specific CIO values can be set for the serving cell and its neighboring cells.
When the quality of signals fluctuates, the probability of triggering handovers to or from a specific cell can be
adjusted by changing the CIO value. This reduces the risk of dropped calls. The CIO values are adjusted
automatically by the MRO function (LOFD-002005 Mobility Robust Optimization).
According to 3GPP TS 36.331, CIO values are contained in the IE Neighbour cell list in the measurement
configuration. The CIO value can adjust the boundary of the associated cell for a handover. A smaller CIO value for
the serving cell results in a higher probability of handovers from the serving cell, and a larger CIO value for the
target cell also results in a higher probability of handovers to the target cell.

6.1.4 Decision on a Handover


In the handover decision phase, the eNodeB checks the measurement result reported by the UE or the blind-
handover priorities. Based on the check, the eNodeB determines whether a handover needs to be initiated and, if so,
to which cell the UE is to be handed over.
The eNodeB derives a list of candidate cells from the measurement report sent by the UE.
For a blind handover, the eNodeB derives a list of candidate cells based on the blind-handover
priorities. See details about blind handover further in this document.
The eNodeB filters out the following cells from the neighboring cell list:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 102 of 189


- Blacklisted neighboring cells;
- Neighboring cells that have a different PLMN from the serving cell if the inter-PLMN handover switch
is turned off which is usually the case;
- Neighboring cells with a handover prohibition flag;
- Neighboring cells in the areas indicated by the IE Handover Restriction List in the INITIAL.
CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message sent from the MME.

If among the candidate cells, the measurement result of an intra-eNodeB cell is the same as that of an inter-eNodeB
cell, the eNodeB assigns the intra-eNodeB cell a priority, which will prevent signaling and data forwarding required
in an inter-eNodeB handover.
The eNodeB then sends a handover request to the target cell at the top of the candidate cell list. If the handover
request fails, the eNodeB sends the handover request to the next target cell. If the eNodeB has tried all cells
indicated in the measurement report but failed to perform a handover, the eNodeB either of the following actions:

- Waits for the next measurement report if the UE measures the neighboring cells;
- Stops the handover procedure if it is a blind handover.

6.1.5 Execution of a Handover

In the handover execution phase, the UE and the eNodeB exchange signaling over the radio interface according to
3GPP TS 36.331. During an inter-eNodeB handover, the source and target eNodeBs exchange signaling and data
through X2/S1 adaptation. The LTE system uses hard handovers, that is, only one radio link is connected to a UE at
a time. Therefore, to prevent user data loss at the eNodeB during the handover, data forwarding is performed to
ensure eNodeB data integrity. Loss of data may cause a decrease in the data transfer ratio and an increase in the data
transfer delay.

6.1.5.1 X2/S1 Adaptation for a Handover

Intra-frequency and inter-frequency handovers are both applicable in the architecture shown in the figure here below
that is, intra-eNodeB handover, intra-MME inter-eNodeB handover, and inter-MME inter-eNodeB handover.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 103 of 189


Figure 6-23: Handover – X2/S1 Adaptation – Architecture view

In the case of an intra-MME inter-eNodeB handover (handover between eNodeB 1 and eNodeB 2 shown in figure
here above), the source eNodeB checks whether the X2 interface is available between the source and target eNodeBs
or not and then automatically selects a path for the handover as follows:
- If the X2 interface is available, the handover request is sent over the X2 interface. Data forwarding is
also performed over the X2 interface.
- If the X2 interface is unavailable, the handover request is sent over the S1 interface. Data forwarding is
also performed over the S1 interface.
In the case of an inter-MME inter-eNodeB handover (handover between eNodeB 1 and eNodeB 3 shown in the
figure here above), the handover request is sent over the S1 interface. In addition, the source eNodeB checks
whether the X2 interface is available between the source and target eNodeBs or not and then automatically selects a
path for data forwarding as follows:
- If the X2 interface is available, data forwarding is performed over the X2 interface.
- If the X2 interface is unavailable, data forwarding is performed over the S1 interface.
In the case of an inter-RAT handover to the UTRAN or GERAN, the eNodeB sends a handover request and
forwards data over the S1 interface.

6.1.5.2 Data Forwarding


The data forwarding process is as follows: After the source eNodeB sends a handover command to the UE, the UE
detaches the connection from the source eNodeB. The source eNodeB then forwards the uplink (UL) data that is
received out of order and the DL data to be transmitted, to the target eNodeB.
Data forwarding prevents a decrease in the data transfer ratio and an increase in the data transfer delay that are
caused by user data loss during the handover.
Intra-eNodeB handovers do not require data forwarding. In the case of an inter-eNodeB
handover, the source eNodeB selects a data forwarding path by using the X2/S1 adaptation

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 104 of 189


mechanism.
In the case of an inter-RAT handover to the UTRAN or GERAN, the eNodeB forwards the data
to the S-GW.
For details about data forwarding, refer 3GPP TS 36.300.

6.1.5.3 RRC Connection Re-Establishment After a Handover Failure

According to 3GPP TS 36.331, the UE performs a cell selection procedure and then initiates a procedure of RRC
connection re-establishment towards the selected cell, after a handover failure.
The RRC connection re-establishment may be successful only when the selected cell is one of the prepared cells. A
prepared cell can be one of the following:

- the source cell;


- the towards which handover preparation has been performed;
- a cell under the same eNodeB as the previous cell.

The RRC connection re-establishment procedure is of two types: successful re-establishment and failed re-
establishment. This procedure is the same for intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT type handover.

A successful re-establishment procedure, according to figure here below, consists of the following
steps:

- the UE sends an RRC Connection Reestablishment Request message to the eNodeB to


which the prepared cell belongs, to request the re-establishment of the RRC connection;
- the eNodeB responds with an RRC Connection Reestablishment message to indicate that it accepts the
request;
- the UE performs the RRC connection re-establishment and sends an RRC Connection Reestablishment
Complete message.

Figure 6-24: Successful RRC connection re-establishment procedure

If the RRC connection re-establishment fails, the UE enters in the idle mode. A failed reestablishment
procedure, according to figure here below, consists of the following steps:

- The UE sends an RRC Connection Reestablishment Request message to the eNodeB to


which the prepared cell belongs, to request the re-establishment of the RRC connection;

- The eNodeB responds with an RRC Connection Reestablishment Reject message to


indicate that it rejects the request.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 105 of 189


Figure 6-25: Failed RRC connection re-establishment procedure

6.1.6 Neighbor Relationship Management

Neighbor relationships define the relationships that the serving cell has with its neighboring cells and they play a
fundamental role in handovers. Neighbor relationship management determines whether to allow the following:

- Automatic removal of a neighbor relationship by ANR;


- Handover of UEs from the serving cell to the neighboring cell;
- Handover over an X2 interface.
-
However, the flag indicating whether to allow handover over an X2 interface has not yet been introduced to Huawei
eNodeBs. For details about how ANR manages neighbor relationships, ANR will be introduced in the next chapter
(SON).
Neighbor relationships are planned in the network design stage. They are automatically adjusted by ANR, if
configured. The ANR function reduces the risk of missing neighboring cells and solves the problems of
inappropriate neighbor relationships caused by collisions of physical cell IDs or by physical positions. In this way,
the call drop rate is reduced and the handover success rate is increased. For details, refer to 3GPP TS 32.511.
There are three types of neighboring cells:

- Intra-frequency neighboring cell


An intra-frequency neighboring cell is a neighboring cell whose DL E-UTRA Absolute Radio
Frequency Channel Number (EARFCN) is the same as the DL EARFCN of the serving cell. A
maximum of 64 intra-frequency neighboring cells can be configured for an E-UTRAN cell.

- Inter-frequency neighboring cell


An inter-frequency neighboring cell is a neighboring cell whose DL EARFCN is different from the DL
EARFCN of the serving cell. A maximum of 64 inter-frequency neighboring cells can be configured
for an E-UTRAN cell. The neighboring cells can be located on a maximum of 8 neighboring E-
UTRAN frequencies. FDD cells can be configured as interfrequency neighboring cells of TDD cells.
TDD cells can also be configured as interfrequency neighboring cells of FDD cells. Huawei eNodeB
supports interoperability between LTE FDD and LTE TDD.

- Inter-RAT neighboring cell


Inter-RAT neighboring cells are neighboring UTRAN cells and neighboring GERAN cells. The
maximum configurations of neighboring cells and frequencies for an E-UTRAN cell are as follows:
128 neighboring UTRAN cells and 16 neighboring UTRAN frequencies; 64 neighboring GERAN cells
and 16 neighboring GERAN frequency groups.

NOTE:
the number of neighboring E-UTRAN cells configured on an eNodeB should not exceed 32, which is specified in
3GPP TS 36.331. The same limitation applies to the neighboring UTRAN cells. If the number of neighboring E
UTRAN or UTRAN cells exceeds 32, certain neighbor relationships cannot be carried in measurement configuration
messages.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 106 of 189


If the target system is E-UTRAN or UTRAN, the eNodeB preferentially selects the cells for which the
EUTRANINTRAFREQNCELL.CellMeasPriority, EUTRANINTERFREQNCELL.CellMeasPriority, or
UTRANNCELL.CellMeasPriority parameter is set to HIGH_PRIORITY. You are advised to set the preceding
parameters to HIGH_PRIORITY for cells that provide optimum coverage and have a high probability of serving as
the target cells. If the number of high-priority target cells exceeds the limit, the eNodeB randomly selects and
delivers some of the high-priority target cells.

To reduce delay, the eNodeB may select a target cell for handover in the absence of the measurement information.
This type of handover is called a blind handover. The candidate cells for a blind handover must be the neighboring
cells with blind-handover priorities other than priority 0. For details about the parameters for blind-handover
priorities, refer to blind handover details here further in the chapter.

In the configuration of inter-frequency neighboring cells, the EutranInterFreqNCell.BlindHoPriority parameter is


also used to differentiate between interfrequency neighboring cells for frequency-priority-based handovers and those
for handovers triggered by other causes. Values 17 to 32 of this parameter are dedicated to frequency-prioritybased
inter-frequency handovers. A frequency-priority-based inter-frequency handover can be triggered only if the target
inter-frequency neighboring cell is configured with a blind-handover priority in the range of 17 to 32. Blind
handover priorities 0 to 16 apply to inter-frequency handovers triggered by causes other than frequency priorities.
For details about handover parameters, refer to the concerned sections here under.

Table 6-73: Handover – Neighbor management priority

Huawei Parameter Current GUI


Huawei Parameter ID Table Current Values
Name Values
EUTRANINTRAFR
CellMeasPriority Cell Measure Priority
EQNCELL
EUTRANINTERFR
CellMeasPriority Cell Measure Priority
EQNCELL
CellMeasPriority Cell Measure Priority UTRANNCELL

Note: these parameters are eRAN6 parameters, so there are no current network values.

6.1.7 UE Capability Configuration

Refer to chaper 1 (1.2.2).

6.1.8 Redirection
Redirection is a method of transferring UEs between cells and is a type of handover when "handover" is used as a
generic term. When a handover cannot be performed in an emergency or due to equipment limitations, the eNodeB
sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message, which contains information about a neighboring frequency in
the LTE system or in another RAT system. Using this message, the eNodeB instructs the UE to initiate a random
access procedure towards an inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cell so that the UE can resume its services.
Compared with handovers, redirections do not include a procedure for initiating a handover request towards a
neighboring cell and therefore have lower requirements for equipment capabilities and can rapidly be performed.
The two methods differ in the way to transfer UEs.

6.1.8.1 Triggering Mechanism


The eNodeB chooses to perform a redirection if a device in the network or the UE involved does not support inter-
frequency or inter-RAT handovers. If both the network and UE support inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers,
handovers are recommended.
The UTRAN, and GERAN network are often mature, and may not support inter-RAT handovers from the
EUTRAN. In this situation, redirections instead of inter-RAT handovers can be performed on UEs. Therefore,

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 107 of 189


network capabilities must be collected to determine whether to enable handovers or redirections for UE transfer. To
enable handovers or redirections, turn on the corresponding switch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch
parameter. If both handovers and redirections are enabled, the eNodeB preferentially uses handovers to transfer
UEs.
During an inter-RAT handover, if the eNodeB determines that the UE does not support inter-RAT measurements or
handovers based on the results of a UE capability inquiry procedure, the eNodeB sends an RRC Connection Release
message to the UE to perform a redirection. This message contains information about the target frequency for the
redirection. For details about the UE capability inquiry procedure, refer to UE capability section.
The eNodeB determines whether the UE is capable of inter-RAT measurements and handovers in an adaptive
manner, without requiring user configuration.
If an SPID is configured for a UE in the EPC or the eNodeB is configured with dedicated frequency priorities, the
eNodeB may deliver a dedicated priority in the idleModeMobilityControlInfo IE of the command for a redirection.
For details about the principles and configuration of SPIDs, see Flexible User Steering Feature Parameter
Description. For details about dedicated priority configuration for UEs in idle mode, see Idle
Mode Management Feature Parameter Description.
In an inter-frequency handover, if the UE does not support inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurements, the eNodeB
performs a blind handover or a blind redirection to transfer the UE to a neighboring cell. For details about blind
handovers and blind redirections, refer to blind handover section.

6.1.8.2 Flash Redirection

The eNodeB supports flash redirections to UTRAN and GERAN. The flash redirection function is controlled by the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.RedirectSwitch parameter. If a switch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.RedirectSwitch parameter
is turned on, the eNodeB includes the system information of the target cell in the redirection command. This enables
the UE to access the target cell sooner because the UE does not need to read the system information.

Only UEs compliant with 3GPP Release 9 or later support fast redirections.

The maximum number of UTRAN or GERAN cells whose system information can be delivered by the eNodeB
during a redirection procedure depends on the value of the InterRatHoComm.CellInfoMaxUtranCellNum or
InterRatHoComm.CellInfoMaxGeranCellNum parameter (indicated as N in the following), respectively.

- In blind handovers, the eNodeB determines target cells in the following two steps. If the
number of available cells is greater than N, the eNodeB selects the first N cells. If the number
is less than N, the eNodeB selects all the available cells.

1. The eNodeB sorts and filters blind-handover target cells. For details about the sorting and
filtering, refer to blind handover here further.

2. The eNodeB filters out the cells whose system information is not acquired.

Note : the eNodeB cannot obtain the system information of a cell that does not support the RIM (RAN Information
Management) procedure.

- If an UE has performed measurements and reported measurement results, the eNodeB determines
target cells in the following steps. If the number of available cells is greater than N, the eNodeB selects
the first N cells. If the number is less than N, the eNodeB selects all the available cells.

1. The eNodeB sorts the cells by measured signal strength in descending order based on the
measurement reports, and adds the cells that are on the redirection target frequencies but not in
measurement reports.

2. The eNodeB filters target cells. For details about the filtering, refer to the section “ Decision on a
Handover.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 108 of 189


3. The eNodeB filters out the cells whose system information is not acquired.

During a flash redirection procedure, the eNodeB uses the RAN information management (RIM) procedure to
acquire system information of the target cell. To use RIM, ensure that the devices in the core network and target
RAN also support the RIM procedure. Note that only UEs compliant with Release 9 and later releases support the
flash redirection function. For this reason this functionality is currently not in use.

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
LoadBasedSwitch-0
&GeranFlashRedirect
ENODEBALGOS
RedirectSwitch Redirection switch Switch-0 Inactive
WITCH
&UranFlashRedirect
Switch-0
Max Utran cell INTERRATHOCO
CellInfoMaxUtranCellNum
num in redirection MM
Max Geran cell INTERRATHOCO
CellInfoMaxGeranCellNum
num in redirection MM

Note: the parameters CellInfoMaxUtranCellNum and CellInfoMaxGeranCellNum are in eRAN6.

6.1.8.3 Blind Redirection without Neighbouring cells defined

In coverage-based inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers and CS fallback, blind redirection is triggered if no inter-
frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cells are available. To enable this function, set related parameters. For details
about how to set the parameters, refer to the blind handover in the following section. If no neighbor relationships are
configured, handovers cannot be performed, including the handover, CCO (Cell Change Order), or redirection
procedure.

Note: this function does not take effect when the eNodeB is configured with correct inter-frequency or inter- RAT
neighbor relationships.

If neighbor relationships are missing on an eNodeB, features and functions related to neighbor relationships are
affected. If an eNodeB cannot trigger the RIM procedure to obtain inter-RAT neighboring cell information, all
related features and functions, such as flash redirection, cannot be triggered.

6.1.9 Blind Handovers

6.1.9.1 Description

"Blind handover" is a generic term for handover, CCO, or redirection for which measurements are not performed.
Blind handovers exclude neighboring cell measurements and therefore reduce the amount of time required for
signaling exchange over the radio interface. If eNodeBs decide to perform blind handovers, they directly enter the
handover execution phase without delivering gap-assisted measurement or measurement configurations. Blind
handovers are used for inter-frequency and inter-RAT mobility. Inter-frequency or inter-RAT blind handovers
require setting of blind-handover priorities for neighboring cells.
In most cases, blind handovers are not recommended, because the absence of neighboring cell measurements
increases the risk of handover failure. However, blind handovers are appropriate in any of the following situations:

- the coverage area of the target cell of a blind handover includes the coverage area of the source cell,
which ensures a successful handover;
- A UE does not support inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurements, in which case only blind
handovers can be performed;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 109 of 189


- Operators have strict delay requirements for features such as CSFB, and therefore gap-assisted
measurements must be skipped to save time. For CSFB, the eNodeB does not deliver a measurement
configuration but performs a blind handover, if BlindHoSwitch under the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter is turned on.
The BlindHoSwitch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter applies only to CSFB.
Whether the eNodeB performs CSFB in the form of a blind handover may be subject to the UE
location. For details about the procedure for CSFB refer to the CSFB description.
- An emergency situation occurs. For example, a coverage-based inter-RAT blind handover might be
triggered by event A2. For details, see Coverage-based Handover further in this document.

In blind handovers, which exclude neighboring cell measurements, the eNodeB selects the target cell or target
frequency based on the blind-handover priority configuration. The figure here below shows the selection procedure.
The eNodeB selects the target system and frequency supported by the UE. Refer to the next sections for details
about inter-RAT, inter-frequency cases.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 110 of 189


Figure 6-26: Handover – Blind handover selection procedure

1/ The eNodeB selects the system with the highest priority.


- For a coverage-based handover or UL-quality-based handover, either an inter-frequency or inter-RAT
blind handover can be triggered, and the priority of inter-frequency handover is higher than that of the
inter-RAT handover. If no E-UTRAN cell can be selected as the target cell, the eNodeB selects an
inter-RAT target cell.
- If the eNodeB selects an inter-RAT system, it preferentially selects the system whose information has
not been delivered in any measurement configurations.
- The CSFallBackBlindHoCfg.InterRatHighestPri, CSFallBackBlindHoCfg.InterRatSecondPri, and
CSFallBackBlindHoCfg.InterRatLowestPri parameters specify the priorities of inter-RAT systems.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 111 of 189


2/ The eNodeB selects a neighboring cell or frequency for the blind handover. If the blindhandover priority of a cell
is 0 or the EUTRANINTERNFREQ.ConnFreqPriority or GERANNFREQGROUP.ConnFreqPriority parameter is
set to 0 for a frequency, the cell or frequency cannot be selected as the target cell or frequency. The priority of a cell
can be the same as that of the frequency for a blind handover. The eNodeB by default assigns higher priorities to
cells than frequencies in the event of blind handovers.

3/ The eNodeB filters the blind-handover targets to prevent a blind handover to an inappropriate target.
- Filtering of the target neighboring cells is the same as that in scenarios where the UE has performed
measurements and reported measurement results, refer to decision on a handover section. Basically it is
filtering out the black listed cells, other PLMN,…;
- When filtering target frequencies, the eNodeB filters out the frequencies whose PLMN is different
from the PLMN of the serving cell. The eNodeB identifies the PLMN information of the target
frequencies and then filters these frequencies.
The PLMN ID of a neighboring E-UTRAN frequency can be obtained from the RAN sharing
information and is composed of the values of the EutranNFreqRanShare.Mcc and
EutranNFreqRanShare.Mnc parameters.
The PLMN ID of a neighboring UTRAN frequency can be obtained from the RAN sharing
information and is composed of the values of the UtranRanShare.Mcc and UtranRanShare.Mnc
parameters.
The PLMN ID of a neighboring GERAN frequency can be obtained from the RAN sharing
information and is composed of the values of the GeranRanShare.Mcc and GeranRanShare.Mnc
parameters.

4/ After filtering the blind-handover targets, the eNodeB performs the following operation:
- If neighboring cells for the blind handover are available, the eNodeB selects the neighboring cell with
the highest blind-handover priority as the target cell.
- If multiple cells have the highest blind-handover priority, the eNodeB randomly selects one from them.
If the blind handover needs to be performed in the form of a redirection, the eNodeB queries the
frequency or frequency group on which the target cell operates and performs a redirection.
 The EutranInterFreqNCell.BlindHoPriority parameter specifies the blind-handoverpriority of
an E-UTRAN inter-frequency neighboring cell.
 The UTRANNCELL.BlindHoPriority parameter specifies the blind-handover priorityof a
UTRAN neighboring cell.
 The GERANNCELL.BlindHoPriority parameter specifies the blind-handover priorityof a
GERAN neighboring cell.

- If no neighboring cell for the blind handover is available, the eNodeB selects a frequencybased on the
EUTRANINTERNFREQ.ConnFreqPriority or GERANNFREQGROUP.ConnFreqPriority parameter
setting and performs a redirection to the selected frequency.

 The EUTRANINTERNFREQ.ConnFreqPriority parameter specifies the frequency


priority, based on which the eNodeB selects an E-UTRAN inter-frequency target
frequency for blind redirection.
 The UTRANNFREQ.ConnFreqPriority parameter specifies the frequency priority, based on
which the eNodeB selects a UTRAN target frequency for blind redirection.
 The GERANNFREQGROUP.ConnFreqPriority parameter specifies the frequency priority,
based on which the eNodeB selects a GETRAN target frequency for blind redirection.

Notes:
 If RAN sharing is not configured for a neighboring frequency, the eNodeB cannot initiate a blind
redirection to that frequency;
 If the eNodeB cannot find a target cell for the blind handover or a target frequency for the blind
redirection, the eNodeB does not perform the blind handover;
 For SPID-based Handover back to the HPLM, refer to the documentation, this is usually not used;
 For inter PLMN, please refer to the documentation, this is usually not used;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 112 of 189


 CS/PS steering feature (EUTRAN to UTRAN), refer to the documentation.

6.1.9.2 Blind handover Parameters

Note: several parameters are introduced in eRAN6, so there are no current network values for all parameters (current
network is eRAN3). No value means that the parameter is introduced in eRAN6, they are also writen in italic.

Table 6-74: Handover – blind handover parameters

Huawei
Huawei Current
Parameter Table Current GUI Values
Parameter ID Values
Name
EutranVoipCapSwitch-0
&UtranVoipCapSwitch-0
&GeranVoipCapSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttVoipCapSwitch-0
&UtranPsHoSwitch-1
&GeranPsHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdNonOtpimisedHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdOptimisedHoSwitch-0
Handover Mode &GeranNaccSwitch-0
HoModeSwitch ENodeBAlgoSwitch inactive
switch &GeranCcoSwitch-0
&UtranSrvccSwitch-0
&GeranSrvccSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttSrvccSwitch-0
&UtranRedirectSwitch-1
&GeranRedirectSwitch-1
&CdmaHrpdRedirectSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttRedirectSwitch-0
&BlindHoSwitch-0
InterRatHighest Highest priority CSFallBackBlindHo
GERAN GERAN
Pri InterRat Cfg
InterRatSecond Second priority CSFallBackBlindHo
UTRAN UTRAN
Pri InterRat Cfg
InterRatLowest Lowest priority CSFallBackBlindHo
CDMA2000 CDMA2000
Pri InterRat Cfg
Connect
ConnFreqPrior
frequency EutranInterNFreq
ity
priority
Connect
ConnFreqPrior
frequency UtranNFreq
ity
priority
Connect
ConnFreqPrior
frequency GeranNfreqGroup
ity
priority
Mobile country EutranNFreqRanSha
MCC
code re
Mobile network EutranNFreqRanSha
MNC
code re
Mobile country
MCC UtranRanShare
code
Mobile network
MNC UtranRanShare
code

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 113 of 189


Mobile country
MCC GeranRanShare
code
Mobile network
MNC GeranRanShare
code
Blind handover 0 = not
BlindHoPriority EutranInterFreqNCell 0 or 1(*)
Priority allowed
Blind handover 0 = not
BlindHoPriority UtranNCell 0 or 1(*)
Priority allowed
Blind handover 0 = not
BlindHoPriority GeranNCell 0 or 1(*)
Priority allowed

Notes:
(*) Regarding the parameter “BlindHOPriority”, only one neighbour can be defined as target, usually it is the co-
located cell, if there is no co-located cell, another can be defined, the most probable one. Although the system send
all neighbour information.

6.1.9.3 Blind handover parameter details

Blind HO.xlsx

6.2 Inter-RAT Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution

6.2.1 Measurement starting/stopping Phase

6.2.1.1 Coverage-based handover

The eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration related to event A2 to a UE in connected mode to monitor the
signal quality of the serving cell. The eNodeB may deliver measurement configurations for two types of events A2
to the UE: event A2 for inter-RAT measurement, and event A2 for blind handover. If the signal quality in the
serving cell is lower than the specified threshold, the UE reports event A2 for inter-RAT measurement. After
receiving the report, the eNodeB delivers an inter-RAT measurement configuration to instruct the UE to perform
inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality in the serving cell further deteriorates and the eNodeB does not
perform a handover for the UE, the UE reports event A2 for blind handover. After receiving the report, the eNodeB
considers that the serving cell can no longer provide services for the UE and performs a blind handover. The
switches UtranRedirectSwitch and GeranRedirectSwitch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter
specify whether coverage-based handovers to GERAN and UTRAN cells are enabled, respectively.

Table 6-75: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 1

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
HoModeSwitch Handover Mode ENodeBAlgoSwitc EutranVoipCapSwitc Active to
switch h h-0 GERAN and
&UtranVoipCapSwit UTRAN
ch-0 (Redirection)
&GeranVoipCapSwit PSHO is
ch-0 inactive
&Cdma1xRttVoipCa
pSwitch-0
&UtranPsHoSwitch-

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 114 of 189


0
&GeranPsHoSwitch-
0&
CdmaHrpdNonOtpim
isedHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdOptimis
edHoSwitch-0 &
GeranNaccSwitch-0
&GeranCcoSwitch-0
&UtranSrvccSwitch-
0
&GeranSrvccSwitch-
0
&Cdma1xRttSrvccS
witch-0
&UtranRedirectSwitc
h-1
&GeranRedirectSwit
ch-1
&CdmaHrpdRedirect
Switch-0
&Cdma1xRttRedirect
Switch-0
&BlindHoSwitch-0

6.2.1.1.1 Inter-RAT measurements triggered by event A2

In a coverage-based inter-RAT handover, event A2 triggers inter-RAT measurements. The triggering of this event
indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold. When the triggering condition
of event A2 is met, event A2 is reported to the eNodeB.
After this, the eNodeB sends the inter-RAT measurement configuration to the UE. The 3GPP TS 36.331 defines the
entering and leaving conditions of event A2 as follows:

Ms + Hys < Thresh (entering condition)


Ms - Hys > Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Ms: is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets;

Hys: is the hysteresis parameter for event A2; ==> InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1A2Hyst

Thresh: is the threshold parameter for event A2;

The threshold for event A2, can be specified by either the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRP
parameter or the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRQ parameter, depending on the setting of the
InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan parameter (triggering quantity for inter-RAT measurement events A1
and A2). The threshold parameters InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRP and
InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRQ correspond to the triggering quantity settings RSRP and RSRQ,
respectively. Note that RSRQ is only used since 3Gpp Rel. 9.

Here below the event A2 triggering mechanism:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 115 of 189


Figure 6-27: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement - Event A2

For inter-RAT measurement event A2, the eNodeB specifies two sets of parameters, with respect to the RSRP and
RSRQ quantities. When InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to BOTH, event A2 is reported
and the eNodeB delivers the inter-RAT measurement configuration to the UE if the signal quality in the serving cell
is lower than the threshold (either the value of InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRP or the value of
InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA2ThdRSRQ) minus the hysteresis throughout the timeto-trigger specified by
theInterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter.
When InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to RSRP or RSRQ, event A2 is reported if the signal
quality in the serving cell is lower than the related threshold minus the hysteresis throughout the time-to-trigger
specified by the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter.
After receiving an event A2 report that triggers inter-RAT measurements, the eNodeB delivers the measurement
configuration related to event B1 to the UE. For details, refer to Inter-RAT Handover Triggering here below.
As in coverage-based inter-frequency handovers (see here further in this document), the eNodeB may not deliver the
measurement configuration related to inter-RAT measurement event A2. For details, refer to Blind-Handover
Triggering by Event A2.

Table 6-76: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 2

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
InterRAT A2 RSRP InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA2ThdRSRP
trigger threshold roup

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 116 of 189


InterRAT A2
InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA2ThdRSRQ RSRQ trigger
roup
threshold
InterRat A1A2
InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan measurement InterRatHoComm
trigger quantity
InterRAT A1A2 InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA1A2Hyst
hysteresis roup
InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTri InterRAT A1A2 InterRatHoCommG
g time to trigger roup

Table 6-77: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 2 current values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterRatHoA2ThdRS InterRAT A2 RSRP trigger -115 (-115 -115 (-115 -115 (-115 -115 (-115
RP threshold dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
InterRatHoA2ThdRS InterRAT A2 RSRQ trigger -24 (-12 -24 (-12
-24 (-12 dB) -24 (-12dB)
RQ threshold dB) dB)
InterRatHoA1A2Trig InterRat A1A2 measurement
RSRP RSRP RSRP RSRP
Quan trigger quantity
InterRatHoA1A2Hyst InterRAT A1A2 hysteresis 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
InterRatHoA1A2Time 640 (640 640 (640 640 (640
InterRAT A1A2 time to trigger 640 (640 ms)
ToTrig ms) ms) ms)

6.2.1.1.2 Inter-RAT event A2 target-based setting

Event A2 specific to a target RAT can be configured on the eNodeB. This ensures that the eNodeB can
preferentially perform a coverage-based handover to a UTRAN or GERAN cell.

The CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset and CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset parameters specify


the offsets of the RSRP thresholds for UTRAN and GERAN inter-RAT measurement events A2 relative to the
RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2, respectively. If CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset or
CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset is not set to 0, the event A2 RSRP threshold delivered by the eNodeB is
the sum of the CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset or CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset
parameter value and the RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2.
The CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset and CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset parameters can be
set to different values, in which case the eNodeB delivers two RSRP thresholds for inter-RAT measurement event
A2. When a UE reports UTRAN inter-RAT measurement event A2, the eNodeB delivers a measurement
configuration for UTRAN inter-RAT measurement. When a UE reports GERAN inter-RAT measurement event A2,
the eNodeB delivers a measurement configuration for GERAN inter-RAT measurement. If the parameters are set to
the same value, the eNodeB delivers one RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2. When a UE reports
event A2, the eNodeB delivers measurement configurations for both UTRAN and GERAN inter-RAT measurement.

Notes:
- The CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset and CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset
parameters do not affect the RSRQ thresholds for inter-RAT measurement event A2;
- If the calculated RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2 is less than the
protocolspecified minimum value, the protocol-specified minimum value is used. If the calculated
RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2 is greater than the protocol-specified maximum
value, the protocol-specified maximum value is used;

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 117 of 189


- If only CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset is set to -100, the eNodeB does not start inter-RAT
measurement for UTRAN frequencies; if only CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset is set to
-100, the eNodeB does not start inter-RAT measurement for GERAN frequencies (frequency groups);
- If both CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset and CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset are
set to -100 or 0, the eNodeB delivers one RSRP threshold for inter-RAT measurement event A2, and
no offset is applied to the threshold;
- In RAN sharing with common carriers mode, the CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset and
CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset parameters can be set to different values for operators, in
which case the operators use different RSRP thresholds for inter-RAT measurement event A2.

Table 6-78: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 3

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
UTRAN A2
UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset Threshold RSRP CnOperatorHoCfg
Offset
GERAN A2
GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset Threshold RSRP CnOperatorHoCfg
Offset

6.2.1.1.3 Inter-RAT measuerements stopped by event A1

In a coverage-based inter-RAT handover, event A1 stops inter-RAT measurements. The triggering of event A1
indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is higher than a specified threshold. The 3GPP TS 36.331 defines
the entering and leaving conditions of event A1 as follows:

Ms - Hys > Thresh (entering condition)


Ms + Hys < Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Ms: is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets;

Hys: is the hysteresis parameter for event A2; ==> InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1A2Hyst

Thresh: is the threshold parameter for event A1;

The threshold for event A1 can be specified by either the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRP


parameter or the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRQ parameter, depending on the setting
of the InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan parameter (triggering quantity for inter-RAT measurement
events A1 and A2). The threshold parameters InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRP and
InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRQ correspond to the triggering quantity settings RSRP and RSRQ,
respectively. Note that RSRQ is only used since 3Gpp Rel. 9.

When InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to RSRP or RSRQ, event A1 is reported if the RSRP or


RSRQ in the serving cell remains higher than the RSRP or RSRQ threshold plus the hysteresis throughout the time-
to-trigger period specified by the InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter. If the eNodeB
receives an event A1 report, it stops the coverage-based inter-RAT measurement.
When InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to Both, event A1 is reported if the signal quality in the
serving cell remains higher than the threshold (either the value of InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRP
or the value of InterRatHoCommGroup.InterRatHoA1ThdRSRQ) plus the hysteresis throughout the timeto-trigger

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 118 of 189


period. If neither of the RSRP and RSRQ measurement results in an event A1 report meets the leaving condition for
event A1, the eNodeB stops the coverage-based inter-RAT measurement.

Here below the event A1 triggering mechanism:

Figure 6-28: Inter-RAT measurement - Event A1

The event A1 threshold must be higher than the event A2 threshold to ensure that event A1 can stop inter-RAT
measurements in coverage-based inter-RAT handovers. If the CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset or
CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset parameter is set, ensure that the event A1 threshold is higher than or
equal to the sum of the CnOperatorHoCfg.UtranA2ThdRsrpOffset or CnOperatorHoCfg.GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset
parameter value and the event A2 threshold.

Figure 6-29: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 4

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
InterRatHoA1ThdRSRP InterRAT A1 RSRP InterRatHoCommG

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 119 of 189


trigger threshold roup
InterRAT A1
InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA1ThdRSRQ RSRQ trigger
roup
threshold

Table 6-79: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 4 current values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterRatHoA1ThdRS InterRAT A1 RSRP trigger -113 (-113 -113 (-113 -113 (-113 -113 (-113
RP threshold dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
InterRatHoA1ThdRS InterRAT A1 RSRQ trigger -20 (- -20 (-
-20 (-10dB) -20 (-10dB)
RQ threshold 10dB) 10dB)

6.2.1.1.4 Blind-Handover triggered by event A2

In coverage-based inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers, the eNodeB can deliver a measurement configuration
related to event A2 for blind handovers if the signal quality of the serving cell deteriorates to a specified level but
the UE has not yet been handed over. If the EmcInterFreqBlindHoSwitch option of the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoAlgoSwitch parameter is selected, the eNodeB selects an inter-frequency target cell when
the UE sends a report of event A2 for a blind handover.
If the EmcBlindHoA1Switch option of the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoAlgoSwitch parameter is selected, the eNodeB
records the reports of event A2 for blind handovers during handover preparation and handles them if the handover
preparation fails. In addition, the eNodeB also delivers the measurement configuration related to event A1 used to
stop a blind handover in case the signal quality in the serving cell further deteriorates. If the eNodeB receives a
report of event A1 used to stop a blind handover from the UE before the blind handover starts, the eNodeB will not
perform the blind handover.
Event A2 for blind handover can trigger both inter-frequency and inter-RAT blind handovers. The event A2
thresholds and processing mechanisms are the same for inter-frequency and inter- RAT blind handovers.
The CellHoParaCfg.BlindHoA1A2ThdRsrp and CellHoParaCfg.BlindHoA1A2ThdRsrq parameters specify the
RSRP threshold and RSRQ threshold, respectively, for events A1 and A2 that are used for coverage-based inter-
frequency and inter-RAT blind handovers.
Other parameters related to events A1 and A2 are specified by parameters for inter-RAT blind handovers: the
triggering quantity is specified by the INTERRATHOCOMM.InterRatHoA1A2TrigQuan parameter, the hysteresis
by INTERRATHOCOMMGROUP.InterRatHoA1A2Hyst, and the time-to-trigger by the
INTERRATHOCOMMGROUP.InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter.
The eNodeB delivers event A2 for blind handover but not event A2 for inter-frequency or inter- RAT measurement
if both the following conditions are met:

- The UE does not support inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement;


- The threshold of event A2 used for inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement is lower
than the threshold of event A2 for blind handover.

The blind handover is implemented only by performing a redirection procedure, because an event A2-triggered blind
handover indicates an urgent situation where the serving cell cannot provide the required service quality. However,
if VoIP services are running on the UE that reports event A2 for blind handover, the eNodeB does not perform an
inter-frequency redirection for the UE.
Refer to the Blind-Handover section above in this document for detailed parameters.

6.2.1.2 Load-based handover

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 120 of 189


Currently not considered.

6.2.1.3 Service-based handover

Currently not considered.

6.2.1.4 Uplink Quality based handover

Currently not considered.

6.2.1.5 Distance based handover

Currently not considered.

6.2.2 Measurement phase

6.2.2.1 Measurement configuration

In the measurement configuration for inter-RAT handover, the information on measurement objects is set for each
RAT; each measurement object can be linked to one or more reporting configurations and each reporting
configuration can also be linked to one or more measurement objects. The measurement configuration includes the
following basic information:

6.2.2.1.1 Inter-RAT measurement object


In the case of UTRAN, the information on a measurement object includes the DL frequency
UTRANNFREQ.UtranDlArfcn and the frequency-specific offset UTRANNFREQ.OffsetFreq.

In the case of GERAN, the information on a measurement object includes the group of neighboring GERAN carrier
frequencies GERANNFREQGROUP and the frequencyspecific offset for the group
GERANNFREQGROUP.OffsetFreq.

The GeranNfreqGroup MO includes the following parameters:


- GeranNfreqGroup.StartingArfcn, which indicates the start ARFCN
- GeranNfreqGroup.BandIndicator, which is the band indicator
- GeranNfreqGroupArfcn.GeranArfcn, which indicates the BCCH frequency

Table 6-80: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 5

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
OffsetFreq Frequency offset UTRANNFREQ
Downlink
UtranDlArfcn UTRANNFREQ
UARFCN
GERANNFREQGR
OffsetFreq Frequency offset
OUP
GERANNFREQGR
StartingArfcn Starting ARFCN
OUP
GERANNFREQGR
BandIndicator Band indicator
OUP

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 121 of 189


GeranNfreqGroupA
GeranArfcn GERAN ARFCN
rfcn

Table 6-81: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 5 values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
OffsetFreq Frequency offset 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB)
3081, 3081, 3081,
3081, 10811
UtranDlArfcn Downlink UARFCN 10811 or 10811 or 10811 or
or 10836
10836 10836 10836
OffsetFreq Frequency offset 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB)
StartingArfcn Starting ARFCN 29 (ch29) 29 (ch29) 29 (ch29) 29 (ch29)
GSM_dcs18 GSM_dcs1 GSM_dcs GSM_dcs
BandIndicator Band indicator
00 800 1800 1800
GeranArfcn GERAN ARFCN

Note: these are per neighbour parameters, so several values are possible, like for the frequencies. This is network
dependent. For GERAN, the band indicator is important in order to differenciate channels in DCS and PCS.

6.2.2.1.2 Measurement report configuration

The measurement report configuration includes the following information:

- Inter-RAT handover thresholds (refer to the triggering section for details);


- Hysteresis InterRatHoUtranGroup.InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst for handovers to UTRAN, and
InterRatHoGeranGroup.InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst for handovers to GERAN;
- Time-to-trigger InterRatHoUtranGroup.InterRatHoUtranB1TimeToTrig for handovers to UTRAN,
and InterRatHoGeranGroup.InterRatHoGeranB1TimeToTrig for handovers for GERAN ;
- Triggering quantity for handovers to UTRAN InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoUtranB1MeasQuan;
- Maximum number of cells to be reported InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoMaxRprtCell;
- Interval between reports InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoUtranRprtInterval for handovers to URRAN,
and InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoGeranRprtInterval for handovers to GERAN
- Number of periodic measurement reports to be sent after an inter-RAT handover event is triggered
InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoRprtAmount.

Table 6-82: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 6

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
CoverageBased
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn InterRatHoUtranGr
UTRAN ECN0
0 oup
trigger threshold
CoverageBased
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdRsc InterRatHoUtranGr
UTRAN RSCP
p oup
trigger threshold
UTRAN handover InterRatHoUtranGr
InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst
hysteresis oup
InterRatHoUtranB1TimeTo UTRAN time to InterRatHoUtranGr
Trig trigger oup
InterRatHoUtranB1MeasQ Utran measurement
InterRatHoComm
uan trigger quantity

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 122 of 189


Max report cell
InterRATHoMaxRprtCell InterRatHoComm
number
UTRAN FDD
InterRatHoUtranRprtInterv
measurement InterRatHoComm
al
report interval
CoverageBased
InterRatHoGeranGr
InterRatHoGeranB1Thd GERAN trigger
oup
threshold
GERAN handover InterRatHoGeranGr
InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst
hysteresis oup
InterRatHoGeranB1TimeTo GERAN time to InterRatHoGeranGr
Trig trigger oup
Geran
InterRatHoGeranRprtInterv
measurement InterRatHoComm
al
report interval

Table 6-83: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement parameter 6 values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterRatHoUtranB1Th CoverageBased UTRAN ECN0 -30 (- -30 (-
-30 (-15dB) -30 (-15dB)
dEcn0 trigger threshold 15dB) 15dB)
InterRatHoUtranB1Th CoverageBased UTRAN RSCP -111 (- -111 (- -111 (- -111 (-
dRscp trigger threshold 111dBm) 111dBm) 111dBm) 111dBm)
InterRatHoUtranB1H
UTRAN handover hysteresis 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB)
yst
InterRatHoUtranB1Ti 640 640 640
UTRAN time to trigger 640 (640ms)
meToTrig (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)
InterRatHoUtranB1M Utran measurement trigger
easQuan quantity
InterRATHoMaxRprt
Max report cell number
Cell
InterRatHoUtranRprt UTRAN FDD measurement
Interval report interval
InterRatHoGeranB1T CoverageBased GERAN trigger -95 (- -95 (- -95 (- -95 (-
hd threshold 95dBm) 95dBm) 95dBm) 95dBm)
InterRatHoGeranB1H
GERAN handover hysteresis 2 (-1dB) 2 (-1dB) 2 (-1dB) 2 (-1dB)
yst
InterRatHoGeranB1Ti 640 640 640
GERAN time to trigger 640 (640ms)
meToTrig (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)
InterRatHoGeranRprt Geran measurement report
Interval interval

Note: the parameters without values, and writen in italic, are from eRAN6, so currently not in the network.

6.2.2.1.3 Measurement quantities and filtering configuration

- The measurement quantity configuration for UTRAN FDD defines the measurementquantity
(InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuan) and filtering coefficients
(HoMeasComm.UtranFilterCoeffRSCP and HoMeasComm.UtranFilterCoeffECN0);

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 123 of 189


- The measurement quantity configuration for UTRAN TDD defines the measurement quantity (RSCP)
and filtering coefficient (HoMeasComm.UtranFilterCoeffRSCP);
- The measurement quantity configuration for GERAN defines the measurement quantity (RSSI) and
filtering coefficient (HoMeasComm.GeranFilterCoeff).

These parameters have been defined already here above an in previous section (Filtering).

6.2.2.1.4 Measurement GAP configuration

Refer to the section here above for details about the GAP.

6.2.2.2 Measurement priorities

Currently not considered.

6.2.2.3 Inter-RAT HO triggering


Coverage-based inter-RAT handovers can be triggered by event B1 or B2, while other types of inter-RAT handover
can be triggered only by event B1. If event B2 is used to trigger noncoverage- based inter-RAT handovers, cell
center users (CCUs) do not report event B2. The type of event used to trigger coverage-based inter-RAT handovers
is specified by the InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoEventType parameter.
Before a coverage-based inter-RAT handover is triggered, the eNodeB checks whether the UE supports events B1
and B2. If the UE supports only event B2, event B2 is used to evaluate whether to trigger a coverage-based inter-
RAT handover. If the UE supports both events, the InterRatHoComm.InterRatHoEventType parameter determines
the event type for triggering a coverage-based inter-RAT handover.
Events B1 and B2 both adopt event-triggered periodical reporting mode.

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
Inter RAT HO
InterRatHoEventType InterRatHoComm
Trigger Event Type

6.2.2.3.1 Event B1 triggering


The triggering of event B1 indicates that the signal quality is higher than a specified threshold in at least one
neighboring cell. The 3GPP TS 36. Defines the entering and leaving conditions of event B1 as follows:

Mn + Ofn - Hys > Thresh (entering condition)


Mn + Ofn + Hys < Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Mn: is the measurement result of the neighbouring cell, not taking into account any offsets;

Ofn: is the frequency-specific offset for the frequency of the neighboring cell. It is specified by the
UtranNFreq.OffsetFreq parameter, for a UTRAN cell and by the GeranNfreqGroup.OffsetFreq parameter for a
GERAN cell. The offset is contained in the associated measurement object IE in the measurement configuration.

Hys: is the hysteresis for event B1. The hysteresis values for inter-RAT handovers to UTRAN and GERAN
specified by the InterRatHoUtranGroup.InterRATHoUtranB1Hyst and
InterRatHoGeranGroup.InterRATHoGeranB1Hyst parameters, respectively are included in the delivered
measurement configuration.

Thresh: Thresh is the threshold for event B1. The values of Thresh are set on the basis of the measurement quantities
for each RAT.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 124 of 189


The measurement quantity for UTRAN can be RSCP, Ec/No, or both as specified by the
InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuanparameter. When
InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuanis set to UTRAN_BOTH, the eNodeB delivers both RSCP and
Ec/No measurement quantities to the UE.

Note:
The 3GPP TS 36.331 specifies that UEs can report RSCP and Ec/No quantities of the UTRAN at the same time. For
UEs that are compliant with earlier releases, the eNodeB sends only the RSCP-related measurement configuration to
the UEs even if the InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoUtranB1MeasQuan parameter is set to UTRAN_BOTH.

When the quantity-based measurement result meets the triggering condition of event B1, the UE reports the
information about the cell where the event is triggered to ensure that the inter-RAT handover is triggered in a timely
fashion. The time-to-trigger for event B1 related to handovers to UTRAN and GERAN is specified by the
InterRatHoUtranGroup.InterRATHoUtranB1TimeToTrig and
InterRatHoGeranGroup.InterRATHoGeranB1TimeToTrig parameters, respectively.

These parameters can be set to different values to differentiate the rates for reporting event B1 related to handovers
to UTRAN and GERAN. The eNodeB sends a handover request to the intereRAN RAT neighboring cell for which
event B1 is reported first. For example, if the value of the InterRatHoGeranGroup.InterRATHoGeranB1TimeToTrig
parameter is greater than the value of the InterRatHoUtranGroup.InterRATHoUtranB1TimeToTrig parameter and a
UE reports event B1 for a handover to UTRAN first, the eNodeB preferentially sends a handover request to a
neighboring UTRAN cell.

Here below the event B1 mechanism:

Figure 6-30: Inter-RAT measurement - Event B1

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 125 of 189


Triggering of event A2 is based on the E-UTRAN quantity (RSRP or RSRQ). Triggering of event B1 is based on the
measurement quantities and thresholds listed in the table here below:

Table 6-84: Handover – categorized event B1 quantities and parameter thresholds

Networ
k Measurement Quantity HO Type Parameter Thres.
Coverage-based

UL Quality-based InterRatHoUtranGroup.
InterRATHoUtranB
Distance-based 1ThdRSCP
RSCP
SPID-based HO to HPLMN

Load-based InterRatHoUtranGroup.
LdSvBasedHoUtran
Service-based B1ThdRSCP
UTRAN
Coverage-based

UL Quality-based InterRatHoUtranGroup.
InterRATHoUtranB
Distance-based 1ThdEcN0
Ec/No
SPID-based HO to HPLMN

Load-based InterRatHoUtranGroup.
LdSvBasedHoUtran
Service-based B1ThdECN0
Coverage-based

UL Quality-based InterRatHoGeranGroup.
InterRATHoGeran
GERAN RSSI Distance-based B1Thd
Load-based InterRatHoGeranGroup.
LdSvBasedHoGera
Service-based nB1Thd

The 3GPP TS 36.331shows the following B1-related parameters are provided in the reporting configuration of the
measurement configuration:

- InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoUtranRprtInterval and
InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoGeranRprtInterval: specify the interval between the reports that are
triggered by event B1. This parameter controls the frequency of the periodical measurement reports
sent by the UE. This reduces the signaling load on the radiointerface.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 126 of 189


- InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoMaxRprtCell: specifies the maximum number of cells to be included in
the measurement report of event B1 for an inter-RAT handover. The limitation on the number of cells
to be reported can save resources on the radio interface.

- InterRatHoComm.InterRATHoRprtAmount: specifies the number of periodical reports to be sent after


event B1 is triggered. The number of event-triggered periodical reports is set to restrict handover
retries.

Parameters:

Table 6-85: Handover – Event B1 parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
OffsetFreq Frequency offset GeranNfreqGroup
OffsetFreq Frequency offset UtranNFreq
CoverageBased InterRatHoGeranGr
InterRatHoGeranB1Thd GERAN trigger oup
threshold
InterRatHoGeranB1TimeTo GERAN time to InterRatHoGeranGr
Trig trigger oup
GERAN handover InterRatHoGeranGr
InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst
hysteresis oup
CoverageBased InterRatHoUtranGr
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn
UTRAN ECN0 oup
0
trigger threshold
CoverageBased InterRatHoUtranGr
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdRsc
UTRAN RSCP oup
p
trigger threshold
UTRAN handover InterRatHoUtranGr
InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst
hysteresis oup
InterRatHoUtranB1TimeTo UTRAN time to InterRatHoUtranGr
Trig trigger oup
InterRatHoUtranB1MeasQ Utran measurement
InterRatHoComm
uan trigger quantity
UTRAN FDD
InterRATHoUtranRprtInter
measurement InterRatHoComm
va
report interval
Geran
InterRATHoGeranRprtInter
measurement InterRatHoComm
val
report interval
Max report cell
InterRATHoMaxRprtCell InterRatHoComm
number
Measurement
InterRATHoRprtAmount InterRatHoComm
report amount

Table 6-86: Handover – Event B1 parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
OffsetFreq Frequency offset 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB)
OffsetFreq Frequency offset 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB) 0 (0dB)
InterRatHoGeranB1T CoverageBased GERAN trigger -95 (- -95 (- -95 (- -95 (-

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 127 of 189


hd threshold 95dBm) 95dBm) 95dBm) 95dBm)
InterRatHoGeranB1Ti 640 640 640
GERAN time to trigger 640 (640ms)
meToTrig (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)
InterRatHoGeranB1H
GERAN handover hysteresis 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB)
yst
InterRatHoUtranB1Th CoverageBased UTRAN ECN0 -30 (- -30 (-
-30 (-15dB) -30 (-15dB)
dEcn0 trigger threshold 15dB) 15dB)
InterRatHoUtranB1Th CoverageBased UTRAN RSCP -111 (-111 -111 (-111 -111 (-111 -111 (-111
dRscp trigger threshold dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
InterRatHoUtranB1H
UTRAN handover hysteresis 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB) 2 (1dB)
yst
InterRatHoUtranB1Ti 640 640 640
UTRAN time to trigger 640 (640ms)
meToTrig (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)
InterRatHoUtranB1M Utran measurement trigger
easQuan quantity
InterRATHoUtranRpr UTRAN FDD measurement
tInterva report interval
InterRATHoGeranRpr Geran measurement report
tInterval interval
InterRATHoMaxRprt
Max report cell number
Cell
InterRATHoRprtAmo
Measurement report amount
unt

Parameter details:

B1 parameter
details.xlsx

6.2.2.3.2 Event B2 triggering

The triggering of event B2 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold and
the signal quality in at least one neighboring cell is higher than another specified threshold. The 3GPP TS 36.331
defines the entering and leaving conditions of event B2 as follows:

Ms + Hys < Thresh 1 and Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh 2 (entering condition)

Ms - Hys > Thresh 1 or Mn + Ofn + Ocn + Hys < Thresh 2 (leaving condition)

Event B2 uses the same set of parameters as event B1 except for parameters: the triggering quantity related to
Thresh 1, the measurement quantity related to Thresh 2, Thresh 1, and Thresh 2.

The Thresh 1 triggering parameters for event B2 are the same as the one used for event A2.

Table 6-87: Handover – event B2 threshold parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
InterRAT A2 RSRP InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA2ThdRSRP
trigger threshold roup

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 128 of 189


InterRAT A2
InterRatHoCommG
InterRatHoA2ThdRSRQ RSRQ trigger
roup
threshold

Table 6-88: Handover – event B2 threshold parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterRatHoA2ThdRS InterRAT A2 RSRP trigger -115 (-115 -115 (-115 -115 (-115 -115 (-115
RP threshold dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
InterRatHoA2ThdRS InterRAT A2 RSRQ trigger -24 (-12 -24 (-12 -24 (-12
-24 (-12 dB)
RQ threshold dB) dB) dB)

6.2.3 Decision phase

The eNodeB decides whether to perform an inter-RAT handover for a UE. Some details have been given already
here above in this chapter (Decision on a Handover).
If the eNodeB receives measurement reports about different RATs, it processes the reports in a First In First Out
(FIFO) manner.
In the decision phase of a service-based inter-RAT handover, the eNodeB decides not to perform a handover for a
UE if the eNodeB detects that a service for which handover is not allowed is running on the UE.
In a coverage-based inter-RAT handover, if the UE reports that it does not support inter-RAT handovers, the
eNodeB decides to perform a redirection to transfer the UE to an inter-RAT neighboring cell. Following these:

- If the UE does not support inter-RAT measurements and handovers and if at least one neighboring cell
of that RAT has been assigned a blind-handover priority, the eNodeB makes a blind-redirection
decision based on the event A2 report. If the eNodeB decides to perform a blind redirection, it sends an
RRC Connection Release message to the UE;
- If the UE supports measurements on an inter-RAT system but does not support handovers to that
system, the eNodeB delivers corresponding inter-RAT measurement configurations to the UE. If the
triggering condition of event B1 or B2 is met, the eNodeB sends the UE an RRC Connection Release
message, instructing the UE to perform a redirection to an inter-RAT neighboring cell.

6.2.4 Execution phase

6.2.4.1 Inter-RAT handover policy selection

The following inter-RAT handover policies are available: PS HO, SRVCC, CCO/NACC, and redirection.
The eNodeB can configure a specific inter-RAT handover policy for each standardized or extended QCI. The policy
ID is specified by the InterRatPolicyCfgGroup.InterRatPolicyCfgGroupId parameter. For a combined service, the
policy is selected based on the highest-priority QCI:

- An inter-RAT handover policy is configured by using the InterRatPolicyCfgGroup MO.


- The configured policy can be assigned to a standardized or extended QCI (specified by
StandardQci.InterRatPolicyCfgGroupId or ExtendedQci.InterRatPolicyCfgGroupId)
by using the configuration group ID (specified by
InterRatPolicyCfgGroup.InterRatPolicyCfgGroupId).

Note:
Do not change the inter-RAT handover policy for each QCI unless necessary.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 129 of 189


A bearer with a QCI of 1 carries VoIP services. Redirection for QCI 1 will affect user experience with VoIP
services. If the target system does not support VoIP services, you are advised not to enable redirection for VoIP
services.

The eNodeB selects a handover policy based on the following factors:


- Handover policy enabled in the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoModeSwitch parameter. The eNodeB selects
from the following enabled handover policies in descending order: PS handover, SRVCC,
CCO/NACC, and redirection.
- QCI of the radio bearer of the UE.
- UE capability and target RAT.

Here below the the HO policy selection:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 130 of 189


Figure 6-31: HO policy selection

Currently, only the redirection is in use.

6.2.4.2 Retry and penalty

In the execution phase of an inter-RAT handover, the eNodeB tries the next best cell among the candidate cells to
initiate the handover if the admission to the target cell fails. If the handover still fails to be initiated after the eNodeB

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 131 of 189


tries all the candidate cells, the eNodeB waits for the next set of event-triggered periodical reports and, if necessary,
performs the next cycle of handover attempts. The eNodeB imposes a penalty on a cell where a non-resource-
induced admission failure has occurred. In a handover attempt, the eNodeB does not send a handover request to such
a cell. This increases the handover success rate and reduces the number of dropped calls caused by handover
failures.
After the eNodeB receives, from a UE, a measurement report containing information about a cell on which penalty
has been imposed for 10 times, the eNodeB can send a handover request to this cell again, which is called a retry. If
a non-resource-induced admission failure occurs in this cell again, the eNodeB will send no more handover requests
for the UE to this cell. The purpose is to prevent a sharp increase in the call drops caused by unexpected problems.
If a UE reestablishes its RRC connection to the source cell after a handover fails due to radio interface failure, the
eNodeB performs handover attempts for this UE based on the new measurement report sent from the UE. If the
target cell is the same as in a previous handover attempt, this is also a retry. If 10 consecutive handover retries in the
same target cell all fail due to radio interface failures, the eNodeB will send no more handover requests for this UE
to this target cell. The purpose is to prevent a sharp increase in the call drops caused by unexpected
problems.
The retry and penalty mechanism for intra-frequency and inter-frequency handovers is the same as that for inter-
RAT handovers.

Notes:
- Based on the cause of failure, admission failure can be classified into two types: resource-induced and
non-resource-induced. After a handover request is sent from the source cell to the target cell, the
admission control of the target cell is performed. If the target cell responds with a resource preparation
failure message, this admission failure is called resource-induced failure. If the target cell responds
with other failure messages or does not return any message within a specified time, this admission
failure is called non-resource-induced failure.
- The radio interface failure is the handover procedure failure caused by failure in transmitting
signalingmessages over the radio interface after the source eNodeB sends the handover command.

6.3 Inter-frequency (LTE800-LTE1800) Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution

6.3.1 Measurement starting/stopping Phase

6.3.1.1 Coverage-based handover


Coverage-based inter-frequency handovers are addressed by the basic feature LBFD-00201802 Coverage Based
Inter-frequency Handover.
The eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration related to event A2 to a UE in connected mode to monitor the
signal quality of the serving cell. The eNodeB may deliver measurement configurations for two types of events A2
to the UE: event A2 for inter-frequency measurement, and event A2 for blind handover. If the signal quality in the
serving cell is lower than the specified threshold, the UE reports event A2 for inter-frequency measurement. After
receiving the report, the eNodeB delivers an inter-frequency measurement configuration to instruct the UE to
perform inter-frequency measurement. If the signal quality in the serving cell further deteriorates and the eNodeB
does not perform a handover for the UE, the UE reports event A2 for blind handover.
After receiving the report, the eNodeB considers that the serving cell can no longer provide services for the UE and
performs a blind handover. The switch InterFreqCoverHoSwitch under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoAlgoSwitch
parameter specifies whether coverage-based interfrequency handover is enabled.

Table 6-89: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 1

Huawei Huawei Parameter Current


Table Current GUI Values
Parameter ID Name Values
HoAlgoSwitch Handover Algo ENodeBAlgoS IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch-1 Active
switch witch &InterFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&UtranCsfbSwitch-1
&GeranCsfbSwitch-1

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 132 of 189


&Cdma1xRttCsfbSwitch-0
&UtranServiceHoSwitch-0
&GeranServiceHoSwitch-0
&CdmaHrpdServiceHoSwitch-0
&Cdma1xRttServiceHoSwitch-0 &
UlQualityInterRATHoSwitch-0
&InterPlmnHoSwitch-0
&UtranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&GeranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&ServiceBasedInterFreqHoSwitch-0
&UlQualityInterFreqHoSwitch-0

This parameter setting is valid for both L800 and L1800, single or dual layer sites.

6.3.1.1.1 Inter-frequency measurements triggered by event A2


In a coverage-based inter-frequency handover, event A2 triggers inter-frequency measurements. The triggering of
this event indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold. When the triggering
condition of event A2 is met, event A2 is reported to the eNodeB.
After this, the eNodeB sends the inter-frequency measurement configuration to the UE. The 3GPP TS 36.331
defines the entering and leaving conditions of event A2 as follows:

Ms + Hys < Thresh (entering condition)


Ms - Hys > Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Ms: is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets;

Hys: is the hysteresis parameter for event A2; ==> InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1A2Hyst

Thresh: is the threshold parameter for event A2;

Thresh is the threshold for event A2. It can be specified by either the InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRP
parameter or the InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRQ parameter, depending on the setting of the
IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan parameter (triggering quantity for interfrequency measurement
events A1 and A2). The threshold parameters InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRP and
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRQ correspond to the triggering quantity settings RSRP and RSRQ,
respectively.

Here below the event A2 triggering mechanism:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 133 of 189


Figure 6-32: Handover – Inter-RAT measurement - Event A2

For inter-frequency measurement event A2, the eNodeB specifies two sets of parameters, with respect to the RSRP
and RSRQ quantities.
When IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to BOTH, event A2 is reported and the eNodeB delivers
the inter-frequency measurement configuration to the UE if the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than the
threshold (either the value of InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRP or the value of
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRQ) minus the hysteresis throughout the time-totrigger specified by the
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter. When IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan
is set to RSRP or RSRQ, event A2 is reported if the signal quality in the serving cell is lower than the related
threshold minus the hysteresis throughout the time-to-trigger specified by the
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter.
After event A2 is reported, the eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration related to event A3, A4, or A5 to the
UE. For details about the triggering of inter-frequency handovers, refer to Inter-Frequency Handover Triggering
here further. In this case only event A3 and A4 are used. Event A5 is not part of this document.
The eNodeB may not deliver the measurement configuration related to inter-frequency measurement event A2. For
details, see Blind-Handover Triggering by Event A2.

Parameters

Table 6-90: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 2

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 134 of 189


Interfreq A2 RSRP
InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRP InterFreqHOGroup
threshold
Interfreq A2 RSRQ
InterFreqHoA2ThdRSRQ InterFreqHOGroup
threshold
InterRat A1A2
InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan measurement IntraRatHoComm
trigger quantity
Interfreq A1A2
InterFreqHoA1A2Hyst InterFreqHOGroup
hysteresis
InterFreqHoA1A2TimeToT Interfreq A1A2
InterFreqHOGroup
rig time to trigger

Table 6-91: Handover – Inter-frequency measurement parameter 2 values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterFreqHoA2ThdRS -107 (-107 -107 (-107 -107 (-107 -107 (-107
Interfreq A2 RSRP threshold
RP dBm) dBm) dBm) dBm)
InterFreqHoA2ThdRS -24 (- -24 (-
Interfreq A2 RSRQ threshold -24 (-12dB) -24 (-12dB)
RQ 12dB) 12dB)
InterFreqHoA1A2Tri InterRat A1A2 measurement
BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH
gQuan trigger quantity
InterFreqHoA1A2Hys
Interfreq A1A2 hysteresis 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
t
InterFreqHoA1A2Tim 640 640 640
Interfreq A1A2 time to trigger 640 (640ms)
eToTrig (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)

Parameters details

HO Inter-freq
meas.xlsx

6.3.1.1.2 Inter-frequency event A2 target-based setting

This refer to inter-freq between LTE FDD and LTE TDD. This is not the case for this network.

6.3.1.1.3 Inter-frequency measuerements stopped by event A1

In a coverage-based inter-frequency handover, event A1 stops inter-frequency measurements. The triggering of


event A1 indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell is higher than a specified threshold. The 3GPP TS
36.331 defines the entering and leaving conditions of event A1 as follows:

Ms - Hys > Thresh (entering condition)


Ms + Hys < Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Ms: is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets;

Hys: is the hysteresis parameter for event A1; ==> InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1A2Hyst

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 135 of 189


Thresh is the threshold for event A1. It can be specified by either the
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRP parameter or the
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRQ parameter, depending on the setting of the
IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan parameter (triggering quantity for interfrequency measurement
events A1 and A2). The threshold parameters InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRP and
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRQ correspond to the triggering quantity settings RSRP and RSRQ,
respectively.

When IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to RSRP or RSRQ, event A1 is reported if the RSRP or


RSRQ in the serving cell remains higher than the RSRP or RSRQ threshold plus the hysteresis throughout the time-
to-trigger period specified by the InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1A2TimeToTrig parameter. If the eNodeB
receives an event A1 report, it stops the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement.

When IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan is set to Both, event A1 is reported if the signal quality in the
serving cell remains higher than the threshold (either the value of InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRP or
the value of InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRQ) plus the hysteresis throughout the time-to-trigger period.
If neither of the RSRP and RSRQ measurement results in an event A1 report meets the leaving condition for event
A1, the eNodeB stops the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement.

Here below the event A1 triggering mechanism:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 136 of 189


Figure 6-33: Inter-frequency measurement - Event A1

The event A1 threshold must be higher than the event A2 threshold to ensure that event A1 can stop inter-frequency
measurements in coverage-based inter-frequency handovers. If the CnOperatorHoCfg.FddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOffset
parameter is set, ensure that the event A1 threshold is higher than or equal to the sum of the
CnOperatorHoCfg.FddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOffset parameter value and the RSRP threshold for inter-frequency
measurement event A2.

Parameters

Table 6-92: Handover – inter-frequency event A1 parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
Interfreq A1 RSRP
InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRP InterFreqHoGroup
threshold
Interfreq A1 RSRQ
InterFreqHoA1ThdRSRQ InterFreqHoGroup
threshold
LTE FDD inter-freq
FddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOffset A2 Threshold CnOperatorHoCfg
RSRP Offset

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 137 of 189


Table 6-93: Handover – inter-frequency event A1 parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterFreqHoA1ThdRS -105 (- -105 (- -105 (- -105 (-
Interfreq A1 RSRP threshold
RP 105dBm) 105dBm) 105dBm) 105dBm)
InterFreqHoA1ThdRS -20 (- -20 (-
Interfreq A1 RSRQ threshold -20 (-10dB) -20 (-10dB)
RQ 10dB) 10dB)
FddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOf LTE FDD inter-freq A2
fset Threshold RSRP Offset

Parameter details

HO Inter-freq meas
A1.xlsx

6.3.1.1.4 Blind-Handover triggered by event A2


Refer to the same topic in inter-RAT handover section.

6.3.1.2 Load-based handover

Currently not considered.

6.3.1.3 Service-based handover

Currently not considered.

6.3.1.4 Uplink Quality based handover

Currently not considered.

6.3.1.5 Distance based handover

Currently not considered.

6.3.2 Measurement phase


When inter-frequency measurements are required, the eNodeB delivers to the UE a Measurement Configuration
message containing the inter-frequency measurement configuration, instructing the UE to perform inter-frequency
measurements. If the triggering condition of inter-frequency handover event A4 is met, event A4 is reported. Based
on the reported inter-frequency measurement result, the eNodeB makes an inter-frequency handover decision.
The measurement phase of the inter-frequency handover consists of inter-frequency measurement configuration,
setup of measurement gaps, and triggering of event A4.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 138 of 189


6.3.2.1 Measurement configuration
In the measurement configuration for an inter-frequency handover, a measurement object is set for each frequency,
and each measurement object can be linked to one or more reporting configurations. The measurement configuration
includes the following basic information:
- Inter-frequency measurement object
The information on a measurement object includes the frequency
EUTRANINTERNFREQ.DlEarfcn, measurement bandwidth
EUTRANINTERNFREQ.MeasBandWidth and frequency-specific offset
EUTRANINTERNFREQ.QoffsetFreq.
- Measurement report configuration
The measurement report configuration includes the following A4-related information:
 Inter-frequency handover thresholds For details, refer to Inter-Frequency Handover
Triggering.
 Hysteresis InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA4Hyst
 Time-to-trigger InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA4TimeToTrig
 Triggering quantity the same as the setting of IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan
 Maximum number of cells to be reported IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell
 Interval between reports IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoRprtInterval
 Number of periodical measurement reports to be sent after the event is
triggeredIntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoRprtAmount
 Reporting quantity IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA4RprtQuan
- Measurement quantity configuration
The measurement quantity configuration defines the L3 filtering
coefficientsHoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRP and HoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRQ.
- Measurement gap configuration
The measurement gap configuration defines the gap pattern HoMeasComm.GapPatternType.

Parameters

Table 6-94: Handover – inter-frequency measurement config parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
Downlink
DlEarfcn EUTRANINTERNFREQ
EARFCN
Measurement
MeasBandWidth EUTRANINTERNFREQ
bandwidth
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset EUTRANINTERNFREQ
Interfreq handover
InterFreqHoA4Hyst InterFreqHoGroup
hysteresis
Interfreq HandOver
InterFreqHoA4TimeToTrig InterFreqHoGroup
Time to Trigger
Max report cell
IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell IntraRatHoComm
number
InterFreq A1A2
InterFreqHoA1A2TrigQuan Measurement IntraRatHoComm
trigger quantity
Measurement A4
InterFreqHoA4RprtQuan IntraRatHoComm
report quantity
Interfreq
InterFreqHoRprtInterval measurement report IntraRatHoComm
interval
Measurement report
IntraRATHoRprtAmount IntraRatHoComm
amount

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 139 of 189


Table 6-95: Handover – inter-frequency measurement config parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
DlEarfcn Downlink EARFCN 1545 6400 1545 6400
MBW75 MBW50 MBW75 MBW50
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth
(15MHz) (10MHz) (15MHz) (10MHz)
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB)
InterFreqHoA4Hyst Interfreq handover hysteresis 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
InterFreqHoA4TimeT Interfreq HandOver Time to 640 (640 640 (640 640 (640
640 (640 ms)
oTrig Trigger ms) ms) ms)
IntraRATHoMaxRprt
Max report cell number
Cell
InterFreqHoA1A2Tri InterFreq A1A2 Measurement
gQuan trigger quantity
InterFreqHoA4RprtQ
Measurement A4 report quantity
uan
InterFreqHoRprtInter Interfreq measurement report
val interval
IntraRATHoRprtAmo
Measurement report amount
unt

Parameter details

HO Inter-freq meas
config.xlsx

6.3.2.1.1 Measurement GAP configuration

The gap-assisted mode is applied to inter-frequency measurements. The eNodeB delivers the measurement gap
configuration in the Measurement Configuration message for inter-frequency measurement. From the measurement
gap configuration, the UE can acquire the start time of the gaps, repetition period, and gap width. Based on this, the
UE performs inter-frequency measurements within the gaps.
The gap-assisted measurement may conflict with Discontinuous Reception (DRX), semipersistent scheduling, or
both. In the case of this conflict, the gap-assisted measurement takes precedence. This, however, affects data
transmission quality. To solve this problem, the design of measurement gaps takes DRX and semi-persistent
scheduling into consideration. The start time of the measurement gaps can be adjusted in a way that the conflicts
with DRX, semipersistent scheduling, or both are minimized whereas gap-assisted measurements are performed
in a timely fashion.

Refer to the section here above for details about the GAP.

6.3.2.2 Inter-frequency HO triggering


Coverage-based inter-frequency handovers can be triggered by event A3, A4, or A5, while other types of inter-
frequency handover can be triggered only by event A4. The type of event used to trigger coverage-based inter-
frequency handovers to a neighboring E-UTRAN frequency is specified by the
EutranInterNFreq.InterFreqHoEventType parameter. If carrier aggregation (CA) is enabled and the
EutranInterNFreq.InterFreqHoEventType parameter is set to use event A4 to trigger coverage-based inter-frequency
handovers, the eNodeB will sends a measurement configuration for event A5 to trigger inter-frequency

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 140 of 189


measurements when a CA UE reports an event A2 in the primary serving cell (PCell). For details, see Carrier
Aggregation, CA is not part of this document.
Events A3, A4, and A5 all adopt event-triggered periodical reporting mode.

Parameters

Table 6-96: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering parameters 1

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
Inter-Freq HO
InterFreqHoEventType EutranInterNFreq
trigger Event Type

Table 6-97: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering parameters 1 values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterFreqHoEventTyp Inter-Freq HO trigger Event
EventA4 EventA3 EventA4 EventA3
e Type

Parameter details

HO Inter-freq
trigg.xlsx

6.3.2.2.1 Event A3 triggering

For details about how event A3 is triggered, refer to Event A3 Triggering in the intra-frequency
Handovers section in this document.
Event A3 in inter-frequency handovers uses the same set of parameters with that in intra-frequency
handovers, except the offset and frequency-specific offset. Specifically, the offset for this event A3 is specified by
the InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA3Offset parameter and applies to all inter-frequency handovers triggered by this
event A3, and the frequency-specific offset is specified by the EutranInterNFreq.QoffsetFreq parameter for each
neighboring EUTRAN frequency.
The measurement quantities for events A1 and A2 are both RSRP. The RSRP thresholds for triggering events A1
and A2 are specified by the InterFreqHoGroup.A3InterFreqHoA1ThdRsrp and
InterFreqHoGroup.A3InterFreqHoA2ThdRsrp parameters, respectively.

Specific Parameters for inetr-frequency

Table 6-98: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering event A3 specific parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
InterFreqHoA3Offset nterfreq A3 offset InterFreqHoGroup
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset EutranInterNFreq
A3 based interfreq
A3InterFreqHoA1ThdRsrp InterFreqHoGroup
A1 RSRP threshold
A3 based Interfreq
A3InterFreqHoA2ThdRsrp InterFreqHoGroup
A2 RSRP threshold

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 141 of 189


Table 6-99: Handover – inter-frequency handover triggering event A3 specific parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
InterFreqHoA3Offset nterfreq A3 offset 2 (1dB) 8 (4dB) 2 (1dB) 8 (4dB)
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB)
A3InterFreqHoA1Thd A3 based interfreq A1 RSRP -95 (- -105 (- -95 (- -105 (-
Rsrp threshold 95dBm) 105dBm) 95dBm) 105dBm)
A3InterFreqHoA2Thd A3 based Interfreq A2 RSRP -99 (- -107 (- -99 (- -107 (-
Rsrp threshold 99dBm) 107dBm) 99dBm) 107dBm)

Parameter details

HO Inter-freq trigg
A3.xlsx

6.3.2.2.2 Event A4 triggering

The triggering of event A4 indicates that the signal quality is higher than a specified threshold in at least one
neighboring cell. The 3GPP TS 36.331 defines the entering and leaving conditions of event A4 as follows:

Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh (entering condition)


Mn + Ofn + Ocn + Hys < Thresh (leaving condition)

Where,

Mn is the measurement result of the neighboring cell.

Ofn is the frequency-specific offset for the frequency of the neighboring cell. It is specified by the
EutranInterNFreq.QoffsetFreq parameter, which is contained in the associated measurement object IE in the
measurement configuration. This parameter adjusts the probability of triggering a handover to a specific frequency.
For example, a cell on frequency A and a cell on frequency B are both candidate cells for a handover. Then, the
offset for frequency A can be increased to raise the probability of selecting the cell on frequency A as the target cell.
The value of a frequency-specific offset can be either positive or negative. A positive value raises the handover
triggering probability, and a negative value lowers the probability.

Ocn is the cell-specific offset for the neighboring cell. It is specified by the
EutranInterFreqNCell.CellIndividualOffset parameter. If the value of this parameter is not 0, the eNodeB delivers
this parameter to the UE through the measurement configuration. If the value is 0, the eNodeB does not deliver this
parameter. In this case, the UE uses the default value 0.

Hys is the hysteresis for event A4. It is specified by the InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA4Hyst parameter and
contained in the delivered measurement configuration.

The time-to-trigger for event A4 is specified by the


InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA4TimeToTrig parameter. Event A4 is reported only when the signal quality of at
least one neighboring meets the entering condition throughout the time-to-trigger.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 142 of 189


Thresh is the threshold for event A4. This threshold varies depending on the triggering quantity or reporting
quantity.

Note:
If the IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA4TrigQuan parameter is set to BOTH, both the RSRP- and RSRQ-based
measurement configurations are delivered. If the IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA4RprtQuan parameter is set to
BOTH, an inter-frequency handover can be triggered only when the RSRP- and RSRQ-based measurement results
of at least one neighboring cell meet the conditions specified in the corresponding measurement configurations.

You can set offset for the RSRP threshold for event A4 related to coverage-based inter-frequency handover. The
offset is specified by the EutranInterNFreq.IfHoThdRsrpOffset parameter. If this parameter is set, the RSRP
threshold for event A4 related to coverage-based inter-frequency handover is the sum of
InterFreqHoGroup.InterFreqHoA4ThdRSRP and EutranInterNFreq.IfHoThdRsrpOffset.
The figure here below shows the event A4 triggering mechanism. When the RSRP- or RSRQ-based measurement
result meets the triggering condition of event A4, the UE reports the information about the cell where the event is
triggered, to ensure that the inter-frequency handover is triggered in a timely fashion.

Here on the figure below the Event A4 mechanism:

Figure 6-34: Handover – Event A4 triggering mechanism

According to the 3GPP TS 36.331, the following A4-related parameters are provided in the reporting configuration
of the measurement configuration:

- IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoA4RprtQuan: specifies the reporting quantity for interfrequency


handover event A4. This refers to the quantity to be included in the measurement reports.
- IntraRatHoComm.InterFreqHoRprtInterval: specifies the interval between the reports that are triggered
by event A4. This parameter controls the frequency of the periodical measurement reports sent by the
UE. This reduces the signaling load on the radio interface.
- IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell: specifies the maximum number of cells to be included in
the measurement report for an intra-RAT handover. In the case of event A4 for an inter-frequency
handover within the E-UTRAN, this parameter specifies the maximum number of cells to be included

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 143 of 189


in the measurement report of event A4. The limitation on the number of cells to be reported can save
resources on the radio interface.
- IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoRprtAmount: specifies the number of event-triggered periodical reports
for an intra-RAT handover. The number of event-triggered periodical reports is set to restrict handover
retries.

Parameters

Table 6-100: Handover – inter-frequency event A4 parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset EutranInterNFreq
Cell individual
CellIndividualOffset EutranInterFreqNCell
offset
Interfreq handover
InterFreqHoA4Hyst InterFreqHoGroup
hysteresis
Interfreq HandOver
InterFreqHoA4TimeToTrig InterFreqHoGroup
Time to Trigger
FreqPrior
loadBased A4
InterFreqHoA4TrigQuan IntraRatHoComm
Measurement
trigger quantity
Measurement A4
InterFreqHoA4RprtQuan IntraRatHoComm
report quantity
Max report cell
IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell IntraRatHoComm
number
Interfreq
InterFreqHoRprtInterval measurement IntraRatHoComm
report interval
Measurement
IntraRATHoRprtAmount IntraRatHoComm
report amount
IfHoThdRsrpOffset EutranInterNFreq
CoverageBased
InterFreqHoA4ThdRSRP Interfreq RSRP InterFreqHoGroup
threshold
CoverageBased
InterFreqHoA4ThdRsrq Interfreq RSRQ InterFreqHoGroup
threshold

Table 6-101: Handover – inter-frequency event A4 parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB) dB1 (1dB)
CellIndividualOffset Cell individual offset dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
InterFreqHoA4Hyst Interfreq handover hysteresis 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
InterFreqHoA4TimeT Interfreq HandOver Time to 640 640 640
640 (640ms)
oTrig Trigger (640ms) (640ms) (640ms)
InterFreqHoA4TrigQ FreqPrior loadBased A4
uan Measurement trigger quantity
InterFreqHoA4RprtQ
Measurement A4 report quantity
uan

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 144 of 189


IntraRATHoMaxRprt
Max report cell number
Cell
InterFreqHoRprtInter Interfreq measurement report
val interval
IntraRATHoRprtAmo
Measurement report amount
unt
IfHoThdRsrpOffset
InterFreqHoA4ThdRS CoverageBased Interfreq RSRP -109 (- -105 (- -109 (- -105 (-
RP threshold 109dBm) 105dBm) 109dBm) 105dBm)
InterFreqHoA4ThdRs CoverageBased Interfreq RSRQ -20 (- -20 (-
-20 (-10dB) -20 (-10dB)
rq threshold 10dB) 10dB)

Parameter details

HO Inter-freq trigg
A4.xlsx

6.3.2.2.3 Event A5 triggering

This event is currently not used.

6.3.3 Decision phase


The eNodeB decides whether to perform an intra-frequency handover for a UE. For details, refer to the decision
phase in the overview section above in the document.
After the eNodeB receives a measurement report from a UE that is performing services unsuitable for a handover,
the eNodeB decides not to perform a service-based inter-frequency handover for the UE.

6.3.4 Execution phase


The eNodeB selects either a handover procedure or a redirection procedure. The eNodeB selects the redirection
procedure only for coverage-based and UL-quality-based inter-frequency handovers when the signal quality in the
serving cell is so poor that no service can be provided for the UE.
The execution of an inter-frequency handover is similar to that of an intra-frequency handover.
For details refer to the execution phase in the next section.

6.4 Intra-frequency Handover Measurement, Decision, and Execution

Coverage-based intra-frequency handovers are addressed by the basic feature LBFD-00201801 Coverage Based
Intra-frequency Handover.
When a UE establishes a radio bearer, the eNodeB sends the UE the intra-frequency measurement configuration,
according to which the UE performs measurements. When the UE moves from the serving cell to an intra-frequency
neighboring cell, the eNodeB initiates a coverage-based intra-frequency handover if the measurement results
indicate that the signal quality in the neighboring cell is higher than that in the serving cell and the related threshold
is reached. It is enabled or disabled by the switch IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch under the

ENodeBAlgoSwitch.HoAlgoSwitch parameter.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 145 of 189


Table 6-102: Handover – intra-frequency parameter 1

Huawei Parameter Huawei Parameter Current


Table Current GUI Values
ID Name Values
IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&InterFreqCoverHoSwitch-1
&UtranCsfbSwitch-1
&GeranCsfbSwitch-1
&Cdma1xRttCsfbSwitch-0
&UtranServiceHoSwitch-0
&GeranServiceHoSwitch-0
Handover Algo ENodeBAlg
HoAlgoSwitch &CdmaHrpdServiceHoSwitch-0 Active
switch oSwitch
&Cdma1xRttServiceHoSwitch-0
&UlQualityInterRATHoSwitch-0
&InterPlmnHoSwitch-0
&UtranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&GeranFlashCsfbSwitch-0
&ServiceBasedInterFreqHoSwitch-0
&UlQualityInterFreqHoSwitch-0

This parameter is the same for both L800 and L1800.

6.4.1 Measurement phase

The intra-frequency measurement results are the basis for the eNodeB to make an intra-frequency handover
decision. After a UE establishes a radio bearer, the eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration to the UE in an
RRC Connection Reconfiguration message. When the UE is in connected mode or a handover is completed, the
eNodeB checks whether the measurement configuration for the UE needs to be updated.

- If the configuration needs to be updated, the eNodeB delivers the entirely or partially updated
measurement configuration to the UE through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
- If the configuration does not need to be updated, the eNodeB does not deliver updated measurement
configuration. In this case, the UE uses the original measurement configuration.

Based on the measurement configuration, the UE measures all cells on the associated frequency within the
measurement scope. If the measurement result meets the entering condition of event A3 for a period defined by
time-to-trigger, the UE reports the measurement result to the eNodeB. After the reporting, if the measurement result
meets the leaving condition of the event throughout the time-to-trigger, the UE stops reporting the measurement
result to the eNodeB.

6.4.1.1 Measurement configuration


In the measurement configuration for an intra-frequency handover, a measurement object is set for each frequency,
and each measurement object can be linked to one or more reporting configurations. The measurement configuration
includes the following basic information:
- Intra-frequency measurement object
The information on a measurement object includes the frequency CELL.DlEarfcn, measurement
bandwidth CellResel.MeasBandWidth, and frequency-specific offset Cell.QoffsetFreq.
- Measurement report configuration

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 146 of 189


The measurement report configuration includes the following A3-related information:
 Offset for the event IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3Offset
 Hysteresis IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3Hyst
 Time-to-trigger IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3TimeToTrig
 Triggering quantity IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoA3TrigQuan
 Maximum number of cells to be reported IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell
 Interval between reports IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoRprtInterval
 Number of periodical measurement reports to be sent after the event is triggered
IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoRprtAmount
 Reporting quantity IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoA3RprtQuan

- Measurement quantity configuration


The measurement quantity configuration defines the L3 filtering coefficients
HoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRP and HoMeasComm.EutranFilterCoeffRSRQ.

6.4.1.2 Event A3
Intra-frequency handovers are triggered by event A3, which is reported in event-triggered periodical reporting mode.
The triggering of event A3 indicates that at least one neighboring cell is offset better than the serving cell. Section
The 3GPP TS 36.331 defines the entering and leaving conditions of event A3 as follows:

Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Ms + Ofs + Ocs + Off (entering condition)


Mn + Ofn + Ocn + Hys < Ms + Ofs + Ocs + Off (leaving condition)

Where,

Mn is the measurement result of the neighboring cell.

Ofn is the frequency-specific offset for the frequency of the neighboring cell. It is specified by the
CELL.QoffsetFreq parameter. This variable is contained in the associated measurement object IE in the
measurement configuration.

Ocn is the cell-specific offset (that is, CIO) for the neighboring cell. It is specified by the
EUTRANINTRAFREQNCELL.CellIndividualOffset parameter. If the value of this parameter is not 0, the eNodeB
delivers this parameter to the UE through the measurement configuration. If the value is 0, the eNodeB does not
deliver this parameter. In this case, the UE uses the default value 0.

Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell.

Ofs is the frequency-specific offset for the serving frequency. It is specified by the CELL.QoffsetFreq parameter.
This variable is contained in the associated measurement object IE in the measurement configuration.

Ocs is the cell-specific offset for the serving cell. It is specified by the Cell.CellSpecificOffset parameter. This
parameter is contained in the associated measurement object IE in the delivered measurement configuration.

Hys is the hysteresis for event A3. It is specified by the IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3Hyst parameter and
contained in the delivered measurement configuration.

Off is the offset for event A3. It is specified by the IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3Offset parameter. This A3-
specific parameter adjusts the probability of triggering handovers. The sum of the value of this parameter and the
measurement result is used in the evaluation of event reporting. This parameter is contained in the associated
measurement object IE in the delivered measurement configuration. The value of this parameter can be either
positive or negative. A positive value lowers the probability of triggering the event for handovers, and a negative
value raises the probability.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 147 of 189


For Mn and Ms in the preceding formulas, the quantity is specified by the
IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoA3TrigQuan parameter. The options are RSRP and RSRQ. According to the 3GPP
TS 36.331, this parameter is contained in the reporting configuration of the measurement configuration.

For example: Both Hys and Off are set to 2 dB. Tests show that the signal quality in the source cell always drops
rapidly and the signal quality in the target cell always rises quickly during handovers. In this situation, to facilitate
handovers from the serving cell to the neighboring cell, the eNodeB sets Ocs to -1 dB and Ocn to 1 dB. In addition,
Ofs and Ofn for intra-frequency handovers are the same and assume that they take the value of 0 dB. Therefore, in
this situation, the entering condition of event A3 is as follows:

Mn + 0 + 1 - 2 > Ms + 0 - 1 + 2

This means that the entering condition is met provided that the measurement result of the neighboring cell is 2 dB
greater than that of the serving cell.

The figure here below shows the event A3 triggering mechanism.

Figure 6-35: Handover – Event A3 mechanism

If the entering condition of the event is met throughout the time specified by
IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3TimeToTrig, the UE reports event A3 and starts the event-triggered periodical
reporting. Then, if the leaving condition of the event is met throughout the time specified by

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 148 of 189


IntraFreqHoGroup.IntraFreqHoA3TimeToTrig, the UE stops reporting event A3. This process involves the
following parameters:

- IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoA3RprtQuan: specifies the reporting quantity for intrafrequency


handover event A3. This refers to the quantity to be included in the measurement reports.
- IntraRatHoComm.IntraFreqHoRprtInterval: specifies the interval between the reports that are triggered
by event A3. This parameter controls the frequency of the periodical measurement reports sent by the
UE. This reduces the signaling load on the radio interface.
- IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoMaxRprtCell: specifies the maximum number of cells to be included in
the measurement report for an intra-RAT handover. In the case of event A3 for an intra-frequency
handover within the E-UTRAN, this parameter specifies the maximum number of cells to be included
in the measurement report of event A3 in order of the signal quality associated with the A3 triggering
quantity in the cells.
- IntraRatHoComm.IntraRATHoRprtAmount: specifies the number of event-triggered periodical reports
for an intra-RAT handover. The number of event-triggered periodical reports is set to restrict handover
retries.

Parameters

Table 6-103: Handover – intra-frequency event A3 parameters values

Huawei Parameter Huawei Parameter


Table
ID Name
Cell individual EUTRANINTRAF
CellIndividualOffset
offset REQNCELL
Downlink
DlEarfcn CELL
EARFCN
Ue max power
MeasBandWidthCfgI
allowed configure CELLRESEL
nd
indicator
Measurement
MeasBandWidth CELLRESEL
bandwidth
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset CELL
CellSpecificOffset Cell specific offset CELL
Intrafreq handover
IntraFreqHoA3Offset IntraFreqHoGroup
offset
Intrafreq handover IntraFreqHoGroup
IntraFreqHoA3Hyst
hysteresis
IntraFreqHoA3Time Intrafreq handover IntraFreqHoGroup
ToTrig time to trigger
IntraFreqHoA3TrigQ A3 measurement
IntraRatHoComm
uan trigger quantity
IntraRATHoMaxRpr Max report cell
IntraRatHoComm
tCell number
IntraFreqHoRprtInter A3 measurement
IntraRatHoComm
val report interval
IntraRATHoRprtAm Measurement report
IntraRatHoComm
ount amount
IntraFreqHoA3RprtQ A3 measurement
IntraRatHoComm
uan report quantity
EutranFilterCoeffRS EUTRAN RSRP
HoMeasComm
RP filter coefficient
EutranFilterCoeffRS EUTRAN RSRQ
HoMeasComm
RQ filter coefficient

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 149 of 189


Table 6-104: Handover – intra-frequency event A3 parameters values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
CellIndividualOffset Cell individual offset dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
DlEarfcn Downlink EARFCN 6400 1545 6400 1545
MeasBandWidthCfgI Ue max power allowed NOT_CFG NOT_CF NOT_CF
NOT_CFG
nd configure indicator G G
MeasBandWidth Measurement bandwidth
QoffsetFreq Frequency offset dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
CellSpecificOffset Cell specific offset dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB) dB0 (0dB)
IntraFreqHoA3Offset Intrafreq handover offset 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
IntraFreqHoA3Hyst Intrafreq handover hysteresis 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB) 4 (2dB)
IntraFreqHoA3TimeT Intrafreq handover time to 320 (320 320 (320 320 (320
320 (320 ms)
oTrig trigger ms) ms) ms)
IntraFreqHoA3TrigQ
A3 measurement trigger quantity RSRP RSRP RSRP RSRP
uan
IntraRATHoMaxRprt
Max report cell number 4 4 4 4
Cell
IntraFreqHoRprtInter 240 (240 240 (240 240 (240
A3 measurement report interval 240 (240 ms)
val ms) ms) ms)
IntraRATHoRprtAmo
Measurement report amount infiniy infiniy infiniy infiniy
unt
IntraFreqHoA3RprtQ SAME_AS_ SAME_AS SAME_A SAME_A
A3 measurement report quantity
uan TRIG _TRIG S_TRIG S_TRIG
EutranFilterCoeffRSR EUTRAN RSRP filter
FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
P coefficient
EutranFilterCoeffRSR EUTRAN RSRQ filter
FC6 FC6 FC6 FC6
Q coefficient

Parameter details:

HO Intra-freq
meas.xlsx

6.4.2 Decision phase


The eNodeB decides whether to perform an intra-frequency handover for a UE. For details, refer to the decision
phase in the overview section above in the document.
The eNodeB does not perform an intra-frequency handover in the form of a blind handover.

6.4.3 Execution phase


The intra-frequency handover execution is controlled by the eNodeB, and the path switching process is performed
jointly by the UE and the eNodeB.

6.4.3.1 Execution policy

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 150 of 189


After making an intra-frequency handover decision, the eNodeB initiates a handover towards the best cell among the
candidate cells. By checking whether the X2 interface is available between the source and target eNodeBs and
whether the two eNodeBs are connected to the same MME, the source eNodeB determines whether to initiate the
handover over the X2 interface or over the S1 interface.
If the handover is successfully initiated, the source eNodeB performs DL data forwarding. After the forwarding is
complete, the target eNodeB (in the case of the handover initiated over the X2 interface) or the MME (in the case of
the handover initiated over the S1 interface) responds with a resource release message, to request the source eNodeB
to release the associated resources. If the handover fails to be initiated, the UE performs a cell selection procedure
and then initiates a procedure of RRC connection re-establishment towards the selected cell.

6.4.3.2 Retry and Penalty

The retry and penaly are the same as for inter-RAT and inter-frequency handover, refer to the inter-RAT handover
section.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 151 of 189


7 SON features

7.1 ANR

7.1.1 General overview

7.1.1.1 Feature overview

This chapter describes the Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) management feature. The functionality and the
related current parameters are listed and provided with their respective decriptions.
This document covers the following features:

- LOFD-002001 Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR)

This applies only to LTE FDD.

The figure here below gives a global view of ANR as it exist in eRAN6. Only the intra-RAT ANR (event triggered
ANR) will be detailed in this chapter.

Figure 7-36: SON - ANR classification

7.1.1.2 Concept

7.1.1.2.1 Neighbour Cell List concept (NCL)

The NCLs of an eNodeB contain information about the external cells of the eNodeB, which belong to other base
stations.
NCLs are classified as intra-RAT NCLs and inter-RAT NCLs. Each eNodeB has one intra-RAT NCL and multiple
inter-RAT NCLs. Only intra-RAT are addressed here in this document.
The intra-RAT NCL records information such as the E-UTRAN cell global identifiers (ECGIs), PCIs, and E-UTRA
absolute radio frequency channel numbers (EARFCNs) of the external E-UTRAN cells. The information is
contained in EutranExternalCell managed objects (MOs).
NCLs are used as the basis for creating neighbor relations. ANR can automatically add or remove external cells
from NCLs.

7.1.1.2.2 Neighbour Relation Table concept (NRT)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 152 of 189


The NRTs of a cell contain information about the neighbor relations of the cell with its adjacent cells. Each cell has
one intra-RAT intra-frequency NRT, one intra-RAT inter-frequency NRT, and multiple inter-RAT NRTs. In this
document, the intra-RAT intra-frequency NRT and intra- RAT inter-frequency NRT are collectively referred to as
the intra-RAT NRT. Only intra-RAT are addressed here in this document.

7.1.1.2.3 Blacklists concept

HO Blacklist
An HO blacklist contains information about neighbor relations that cannot be used for a handover
or removed automatically from the NRT by ANR. The neighbor relations in the HO blacklist must
meet both of the following conditions:

 No Remove is set to prohibit removals;


 No HO is set to prohibit handovers.

Neighbor relations can manually be added to the HO blacklist. For details, refer to 3GPP TS 32.511.

X2 Blacklist
An X2 blacklist contains information about the neighboring eNodeBs with which the local
eNodeB is not permitted to set up X2 interfaces. If an X2 interface has been set up between the
local eNodeB and a neighboring eNodeB in the X2 blacklist, this X2 interface is removed
automatically.

RRC Blacklist
An RRC blacklist contains the neighboring E-UTRAN cells whose information will not be
measured or reported to the eNodeB by UEs. You can manually add an intra- or inter-frequency
neighboring cell to an RRC blacklist.

7.1.1.2.4 Whitelists concept

HO Whitelist
An HO whitelist contains information about neighbor relations that can be used for a handover
but cannot be removed automatically from the NRT by ANR. The neighbor relations in the HO
whitelist must meet both of the following conditions:

 No Remove is set to prohibit removals;


 No HO is set to permit handovers.

Neighbor relations can manually be added to the HO whitelist. For details, refer to the 3GPP TS 32.511.

X2 Whitelist
An X2 whitelist contains information about the neighboring eNodeBs with which the local
eNodeB has set up X2 interfaces. These X2 interfaces cannot be removed automatically.

7.1.2 Intra-RAT ANR

7.1.2.1 Activation

Intra-RAT event-triggered ANR is activated when the IntraRatEventAnrSwitch check box is selected under the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch parameter.
Intra-RAT event-triggered ANR detects missing intra-RAT neighboring cells and abnormal neighboring cell
coverage, and maintains neighbor relations.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 153 of 189


ANR can detect missing neighboring cells using UE history information in addition to eventtriggered UE
measurements.

Table 7-105: SON - ANR – Activation parameter

Huawei
Huawei Current
Parameter Table Current GUI Values
Parameter ID Values
Name
IntraRatEventAnrSwitch-1
&IntraRatFastAnrSwitch-0
&IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch-0
&UtranEventAnrSwitch-0
&GeranEventAnrSwitch-0
ANR
&UtranFastAnrSwitch-0
AnrSwitch algorithm ENodeBAlgoSwitch
&GeranFastAnrSwitch-0
switch
&CdmaFastAnrSwitch-0
&UtranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&GeranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&CdmaAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&ExtendIntraRatAnrSwitch-0

This parameter is active for both L800 and L1800.

7.1.2.2 Detecting missing neighbours by event triggered

Intra-RAT event-triggered ANR detects cells with unknown PCIs based on the intra- and interfrequency
measurement reports that contain information about cells that meet handover requirements.

Note:
Intra-RAT event-triggered ANR is triggered only by coverage-based handover measurements and
interfrequency mobility load balancing (MLB) measurements.
The eNodeB does not select CA UEs to perform intra-RAT ANR measurements.

For example, cell A and cell B are involved in a handover. The UE is under the coverage of cell
A of the source eNodeB, and cell B is a neighboring cell of cell A. The figure here below outlines how the eNodeB
uses event-triggered UE measurements to detect cell B.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 154 of 189


Figure 7-37: SON - ANR – Event triggered Procedure (UE measurement)

7.1.2.2.1 Procedure description

1. The source eNodeB delivers the measurement configuration to the UE, instructing the UE to measure neighboring
cells as specified in the measurement configuration.
The UE performs intra-frequency measurements by default. When a UE establishes radio bearers, by default, the
eNodeB delivers the intra-frequency measurement configuration to the UE in an RRC Connection Reconfiguration
message. When inter-frequency measurements are required, the eNodeB must deliver the inter-frequency
measurement configuration to the UE and set up inter-frequency measurement gaps. For details about
intra- and inter-frequency handover measurements, refer to the Handover chapter.
2. The UE detects that cell B meets the measurement requirements, and it reports the PCI of cell B to the source
eNodeB.
Note that the UE does not report the PCIs of the neighboring cells in the RRC blacklist to the eNodeB.

3. The source eNodeB checks whether its intra-RAT NCL includes the PCI of cell B. If the NCL includes this PCI,
the ANR procedure ends. If the NCL does not include this PCI, the source eNodeB sends the measurement
configuration to the UE, instructing the UE to read the ECGI, tracking area code (TAC), and PLMN list of cell B.

4. The source eNodeB enables the UE to read these parameters over the broadcast channel (BCH).

5. The UE reports the obtained parameter values to the source eNodeB.


The source eNodeB adds the newly detected neighboring cell (cell B) to its intra-RAT NCL and adds the neighbor
relation to an intra-RAT NRT of cell A.

During this procedure, if the source eNodeB detects that cell B is under itself based on the operating frequency and
PCI of cell B reported by the UE, the source eNodeB does not trigger the ECGI reading procedure. Instead, it
directly adds cell B to an intra-RAT NRT of cell A and adds cell A to an intra-RAT NRT of cell B.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 155 of 189


7.1.2.3 Detecting missing neighbours by using UE history information

During a handover, the source eNodeB sends UE history information to the target eNodeB.
The figure here below outlines the procedure for using UE history information to detect a missing intra- RAT
neighboring cell.

Figure 7-38: SON - ANR – UE history information Procedure

Notes:
UE history information consists of information about all the cells that have provided services for the UE.
Defined in the 3GPP TS 36.413 and 3GPP TS 36.423, this information includes:

- ECGI of the last visited cell


- Type of the last visited cell
- Duration of the time the UE stayed in the cell

7.1.2.3.1 Procedure description

1. The source eNodeB sends a Handover Request message to the target eNodeB.
2. The target eNodeB obtains the UE history information from the message. The target eNodeB checks whether the
ECGI of the last visited cell (in this case, the source cell) exists in the NCL of the target eNodeB and then proceeds
as follows:

- If the ECGI exists in the NCL but does not exist in the NRT, the target eNodeB adds the neighbor relation
to the NRT. The procedure ends;
- If the ECGI does not exist in the NCL, the target eNodeB proceeds to point 3.

3. The target eNodeB reports the ECGI of the source cell to the M2000.
4. The M2000 queries the PCI, TAC, and PLMN list of the source cell based on the reported ECGI and sends the
parameters to the target eNodeB. The target eNodeB adds the source cell to its intra-RAT NCL.

7.1.2.4 Automatic maintenance of NCL’s and NRT’s

Automatic maintenance of NCLs and NRTs ensures the validity of neighbor relations and therefore significantly
improves network performance.
Automatic removal of intra-RAT neighbor relations is controlled by th IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch option of the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch parameter. When a network is unstable or in the early stage of deployment, you are
advised to disable automatic removals. The purpose of this action is to prevent frequent NCL/NRT updates so that
the collection of neighbor relations can be completed as quickly as possible.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 156 of 189


- When the IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch check box is not selected under the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch parameter, intra-RAT neighbor relations cannot be removed
automatically by ANR.
- When the IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch check box is selected under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch
parameter, intra-RAT neighbor relations whose control mode is AUTO_MODE can be removed
automatically by ANR.
-
The control modes for neighbor relations are specified by parameters as follows:

- The control mode for the neighbor relation with an external E-UTRAN cell is specified by
EutranExternalCell.CtrlMode.
- The control mode for the neighbor relation with an intra-frequency neighboring cell is specified by
EutranIntraFreqNCell.CtrlMode.
- The control mode for the neighbor relation with an inter-frequency neighboring cell is specified by
EutranInterFreqNCell.CtrlMode.
- The control mode for a neighboring frequency is specified by EutranInterNFreq.CtrlMode.

Notes:
- Neighbor relations whose control mode is AUTO_MODE can be modified or removed manually by
users or automatically by ANR. Neighbor relations whose control mode is MANUAL_MODE can be
modified or removed only manually by users.
- The control mode is set to AUTO_MODE for neighbor relations that are automatically created during
SON operations. The control mode can be set to AUTO_MODE or MANUAL_MODE for neighbor
relations that are manually created.
- When ANR automatically adds an intra-RAT neighbor relation, it uses the default values for
parameters whose values cannot be obtained from UE measurements or UE history information.

Table 7-106: SON - ANR – NCL and NRT automatic maintenace parameters

Huawei
Huawei Current
Parameter Table Current GUI Values
Parameter ID Values
Name
IntraRatEventAnrSwitch-1
&IntraRatFastAnrSwitch-0
&IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch-0
&UtranEventAnrSwitch-0
&GeranEventAnrSwitch-0
ANR algorithm &UtranFastAnrSwitch-0
AnrSwitch ENodeBAlgoSwitch Inactive
switch &GeranFastAnrSwitch-0
&CdmaFastAnrSwitch-0
&UtranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&GeranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&CdmaAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&ExtendIntraRatAnrSwitch-0
CtrlMode Control Mode EutranExternalCell
CtrlMode Control Mode EutranIntraFreqNCell
CtrlMode Control Mode EutranInterFreqNCell

This parameter is switch off for both L800 and L1800.

Note: several parameters are introduced in eRAN6, so there are no current network values for all parameters (current
network is eRAN3). No value means that the parameter is introduced in eRAN6, they are also writen in italic.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 157 of 189


7.1.2.4.1 Automatic Maintenance of NCL’s

During NCL automatic maintenance, the eNodeB can automatically add a newly detected external cell to an NCL or
remove an external cell from an NCL.
The eNodeB automatically adds an external cell to an NCL in either of the following cases:

- The eNodeB detects a missing neighboring cell based on UE measurements and receives information
about this cell, including the ECGI, TAC, and PLMN list.
- The eNodeB detects a missing intra-RAT neighboring cell based on UE history information.

The function of automatically removing a cell from an NCL is controlled by the IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch check
box under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch parameter.
The eNodeB automatically removes an external cell from an NCL if this switch is turned on and
all of the following conditions are met:

- The measurement period, which is four times the value of ANR.StatisticPeriodForNRTDel, has
elapsed.
The measurement period specified by ANR.StatisticPeriodForNRTDel starts when an event-triggered
ANR switch is turned on for E-UTRAN, UTRAN, GERAN.

- The NRTs of all cells under the local eNodeB do not contain any neighbor relations with this external
cell.
- No X2 interface has been set up between the local eNodeB and the eNodeB to which this external cell
belongs.
- Control Mode is set to AUTO_MODE for the neighbor relations with the external cell.

The eNodeB automatically removes an external cell from an NCL if the number of neighbor relations in the NCL
has reached the maximum number and a neighboring cell is to be added to the NCL by ANR.
In this case, the eNodeB removes one of the external cells that meet the following conditions from the NCL. This
function is not under parameter control.

- The NRTs of all cells under the local eNodeB do not contain any neighbor relations with this external
cell.
- Control Mode is set to AUTO_MODE for the external cell.

Parameters

Table 7-107: SON - ANR – NCL parameters

Huawei
Huawei Current
Parameter Table Current GUI Values
Parameter ID Values
Name
IntraRatEventAnrSwitch-1
&IntraRatFastAnrSwitch-0
&IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch-0
&UtranEventAnrSwitch-0
&GeranEventAnrSwitch-0
ANR algorithm &UtranFastAnrSwitch-0
AnrSwitch ENodeBAlgoSwitch Inactive
switch &GeranFastAnrSwitch-0
&CdmaFastAnrSwitch-0
&UtranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&GeranAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&CdmaAutoNrtDeleteSwitch-1
&ExtendIntraRatAnrSwitch-0

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 158 of 189


This parameter is switch off for both L800 and L1800.

7.1.2.4.2 Automatic Maintenance of NRT’s

During NRT automatic maintenance, the eNodeB can automatically add a neighbor relation to an NRT or remove a
neighbor relation from an NRT in free mode or in controlled mode. The maintenance mode is controlled by the
ANR.OptMode parameter.

- If this parameter is set to FREE, the optimization advice generated by ANR takes effect directly, that
is, the eNodeB automatically adds a neighbor relation to an NRT or removes a neighbor relation from
an NRT without user confirmation.
- If this parameter is set to CONTROLLED, the eNodeB reports the optimization advice to the M2000.
Users determine whether to add a neighbor relation to an NRT or remove a neighbor relation from an
NRT. However, after receiving handover-related measurement reports from UEs, the eNodeB can
perform intra-RAT handovers for the UEs even if users have not confirmed the optimization advice to
add the target cell to the intra-RAT NRT.
-
The eNodeB automatically adds a neighbor relation to an NRT in either of the following cases:

- The eNodeB detects a missing neighboring cell based on UE measurements, receives information
(such as the ECGI, TAC, and PLMN list) about this cell, and adds this information to the NCL. If the
detected cell already exists in the NCL, the eNodeB directly adds the neighbor relation to the NRT.
- The eNodeB detects a missing neighboring cell based on UE history information in a handover request
message and finds that the ECGI of the last visited cell exists in the NCL of the target eNodeB but
does not exist in the NRT of the target cell.
-
The eNodeB automatically removes a neighbor relation (for example, with cell A) from an NRT if the
IntraRatAnrAutoDelSwitch check box under the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.AnrSwitch parameter is selected, the No
Remove attribute for the neighbor relation is set to permit removals, the Control Mode parameter for the neighbor
relation is set to AUTO_MODE, and either of the following conditions is met:

- When the number of neighbor relations in an intra-RAT intra-frequency or inter-frequency NRT has
reached the maximum of 64, a new neighbor relation needs to be added through ANR. In addition,
within the last measurement period specified by the ANR.StatisticPeriodForNRTDel parameter, the
total number of handovers from the local cell to its neighboring cells was greater than or equal to the
value of ANR.StatisticNumForNRTDel and cell A has never been included in any handover-related
measurement reports.
If more than one neighbor relation meets these conditions, the eNodeB randomly selects one. If no
neighbor relation meets the conditions, the eNodeB does not remove a neighbor relation.
- The success rate of handovers to a neighboring cell is lower than expected.
The eNodeB removes a neighboring cell from an NRT and NCL or reports the optimization advice to
the M2000 if the following conditions are met:
 Within a measurement period specified by the ANR.StatisticPeriodStatisticPeriod parameter,
the number of handovers from each of the cells who have configured with neighbor relation
with the neighboring cell under the eNodeB to the neighboring cell is greater than or equal to
the value of ANR.NcellHoStatNum.
 The handover success rate for each of the cells under the eNodeB to the neighboring cell is
less than or equal to the value of ANR.DelCellThd.

Notes:
- The measurement period specified by ANR.StatisticPeriodForNRTDel starts when any eventtriggered
ANR switch is turned on for E-UTRAN, UTRAN, GERAN, or CDMA2000.
- The measurement period specified by ANR.StatisticPeriod starts when the switch for intra-RAT event
triggered ANR IntraRatEventAnrSwitch is turned on.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 159 of 189


- If a missing neighboring cell was included in only one measurement report and then added to the NRT
within the previous measurement period, the eNodeB does not count this measurement report when
measuring the number of handover-related measurement reports that include this neighboring cell. As a
result, this neighboring cell will be removed from the NRT by the eNodeB within the current
measurement period if the number of neighbor relations in the NRT has reached the maximum of 64
and a new neighbor relation needs to be added through ANR.
Parameters

Table 7-108: SON - ANR – NCL parameters

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
OptMode Optimization Mode ANR FREE
Statistic Number
StatisticNumForNRTDel ANR 200
For Delete NRT
StatisticPeriod Statistic cycle ANR 1440 1440 min
StatisticPeriodForNRTDel Statistic Cycle For
ANR 10080 10080 min
Delete NRT
NcellHoStatNum Least Handover ANR
1 1
Num for Statistic
DelCellThd ANR delete cell ANR
60 60%
threshold
AddCellThd ANR add cell ANR
80 80%
threshold

Note: the ANR parameter table is on eNodeB level and not on cell level.

Parameter details

ANR.xlsx

7.1.3 Inter-RAT ANR


Currently not in use.

7.1.4 FAST ANR


Currently not in use.

7.2 PCI Conflict detection/optimization

7.2.1 Introduction

Physical cell identifiers (PCIs) are used for signal synchronization and demodulation. There are504 PCIs in the LTE
system. These PCIs are divided into 168 groups, each containing 3 PCIs.
Each evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (EUTRAN) cell is allocated a PCI.
When many cells exist in an LTE system, some cells with the same frequency must share one PCI. A PCI conflict
may occur between cells with the same frequency if PCIs are planned inappropriately or changed manually, or if
neighboring cell parameters are modified.
Huawei developed the PCI conflict detection and self-optimization feature, which provides the following functions:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 160 of 189


- PCI conflict detection
Detects PCI conflicts in the EUTRAN. The eNodeB triggers PCI conflict detection when its
neighboring cell, PCI, or frequency changes. The change may be caused by manual operation, ANR, or
message exchanges over the X2 interface.

- PCI self-optimization
Reallocates appropriate PCIs to conflicting cells based on the PCI conflict detection result.

Note: at the time of writing the document, this feature is not in use, so there are no relevant current setting.

7.2.2 PCI Conflict Detection

7.2.2.1 PCI Conflict Types

The PCI conflict is classified into PCI collision and PCI confusion.

7.2.2.2 PCI Collision

A PCI collision occurs between two intra-frequency cells that use an identical PCI but are insufficiently isolated. In
this case, UEs in the overlapping area of the two cells cannot implement signal synchronization or decoding. The
figure here below shows a PCI collision between cell A and cell B.

If a cell has the same frequency and PCI as one of its neighboring cells, there is a PCI collision between the cell and
the neighboring cell.

Notes: an LTE cell is not allowed to have the same frequency and PCI as its neighboring cell but it can have the
same frequency and PCI as its external cell or other intra-eNodeB cells.

Figure 7-39: SON – PCI Collision

7.2.2.3 PCI Confusion

A PCI confusion occurs between a detected cell and a neighboring cell if the two cells have the same frequency and
PCI and if the reference signal received power (RSRP) of the two cells reaches the handover threshold. The PCI
confusion may lead to UE handover failures or service drops.
A PCI confusion occurs in the following scenarios:

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 161 of 189


- The detected cell is a configured neighboring cell of the serving cell;
- The detected cell is not a configured neighboring cell of the serving cell.

7.2.2.3.1 PCI Confusion when the Detected Cell Is a Configured Neighboring Cell

As shown in the figure here below, if the UE does not support ANR, the eNodeB cannot determine whether the
detected cell is cell B or C based on the report by the UE. In this case, cell A cannot initiate a handover. If intra-
RAT event-triggered ANR is enabled and the UE supports ANR, the eNodeB can identify cell B based on the
EUTRAN cell global identifier (ECGI) reported by the UE.

Then, a handover to cell B can be performed if necessary.

If two or more neighboring cells of a cell have the same frequency and PCI, there is a PCI conflict between these
neighboring cells.

Figure 7-40: SON – PCI Confusion (configured neighbour)

7.2.2.3.2 PCI Confusion when the Detected Cell Is Not a Configured Neighboring Cell

As shown in the figure here below, the eNodeB mistakenly considers that the detected cell is cell C and then initiates
a handover to cell C. If the spot that the UE is on is not covered by cell C but cell B, a handover failure may occur.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 162 of 189


Figure 7-41: SON – PCI Confusion (not configured neighbour)

7.2.2.4 PCI Conflict Detection Methods


The PCI conflicts concerned in this document are all detectable by the eNodeB. Any changes in the PCI conflict
parameters will drive the eNodeB to check for PCI conflicts. The following are possible changes:

- The PCI or frequency of an eNodeB's local cell is changed.


- The PCI or frequency of an external EUTRAN cell is changed, or an external EUTRAN cell is added
or removed.
- A neighboring cell in the intra-frequency or inter-frequency NRT is added or removed.

An eNodeB detects PCI conflicts in the following scenarios:

- PCI conflict detection triggered by manual operations. The PCI conflict parameters are changed due to
manual modifications to the PCI, frequency or other parameters.
- PCI conflict detection triggered by ANR. ANR adds or removes a neighboring cell, or it updates the
PCI of the neighboring cell.
- PCI conflict detection based on X2 messages.The eNodeB receives an X2 message. If an X2
connection has been set up between the eNodeBs and
GlobalProcSwitch.X2BasedUptENodeBCfgSwitch is turned on, one eNodeB will update the
neighboring cell parameters based on another eNodeB's cell information carried in the message.

If the eNodeB detects or resolves a PCI conflict, it reports the PCI conflict information to the M2000 client and this
information will be updated in the PCI Optimization Task window on the M2000 client. The M2000 client also
decides whether to allow the eNodeB to report the ALM-29247 Cell PCI Conflict alarm to the M2000 alarm console
or LMT alarm interface, depending on the setting of the ENodeBAlgoSwitch.PciConflictAlmSwitch parameter

Notes:
For details about NCLs and NRTs, refer to the ANR chapter.
If the CME is available and you need to change the configuration of an eNodeB through the CME, turn off
GlobalProcSwitch.X2BasedUptENodeBCfgSwitch to avoid configuration data loss. This is because when the
configuration (such as the PCI or frequency) of an eNodeB is changed on the CME, the CME updates the
parameters of the eNodeB in the neighboring cell list (NCL), which triggers PCI conflict detection and may change
neighboring cell data. This conflicts with the neighboring cell data change triggered when
GlobalProcSwitch.X2BasedUptENodeBCfgSwitch is turned on.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 163 of 189


7.2.3 PCI Self Optimization

7.2.3.1 Overview
If the eNodeB detects that the PCI of a cell conflicts with a configured PCI, the eNodeB notifies the M2000 of the
conflict. The M2000 then allocates an appropriate PCI to this conflicting cell.
The new PCI takes effect after the M2000 sends it to the eNodeB.

7.2.3.2 First-Order Neighboring Cell

Each eNodeB stores an NCL and NRTs. The NRTs contain information about the neighboring cells of the local cells
of this eNodeB. These neighboring cells are the first-order neighboring cells. These cells may be intra-frequency,
inter-frequency, or inter-RAT neighboring cells. RAT is short for radio access technology.

Notes : for details about NCLs and NRTs, refer to the ANR chapter.

7.2.3.3 Second-Order Neighboring Cell

The first-order neighboring cells of the first-order neighboring cells of a cell are the secondorder neighboring cells
of this cell. Assume that cell B is a first-order neighboring cell of cell A and cell C is a first-order neighboring cell
of cell B. Then, cell C is a second-order neighboring cell of cell A.

7.2.4 PCI Re-assignment


PCI re-assignment adheres to the following principles:

Note: for simplicity, the following uses "new PCI" to represent a PCI to be allocated to a conflicting cell.

- A new PCI must be different from the PCI of any first-order or second-order intra-frequency
neighboring cell of the conflicting cell.
- A new PCI must be different from the PCI of any intra-frequency neighboring cell in the NCL of the
conflicting cell.
- A new PCI must be different from the PCI of any cells under the same eNodeB as the conflicting cell.
- If the blacklist is considered:

 A new PCI must be different from the PCI of any blacklisted intra-frequency EUTRAN cell of
the conflicting cell.
 If the conflicting cell is not in the intra-frequency EUTRAN cell blacklist of any of its first-
order neighboring cells, the new PCI must not be within the range specified by
IntraFreqBlkCell.PhyCellIdRange.
 If the conflicting cell is not in the inter-frequency EUTRAN cell blacklist of any of its first-
order neighboring cells, and there is a cell with the same frequency as the conflicting cell in
the inter-frequency EUTRAN cell blacklist, the new PCI must not be within the range
specified by InterFreqBlkCell.PhyCellIdRange.
Note: the UE does not report the blacklisted cells so that the previously detected conflicting
cells are still detectable after PCI self-optimization.

In addition, PCI self-optimization considers the following factors:

- Positions of physical resource blocks (PRBs) occupied by the physical HARQ indicator channel
(PHICH) and physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH)
If the conflicting cell uses compressed bandwidth, the M2000 avoids allocating some restricted PCIs to
the conflicting cell. This prevents the PHICH and PCFICH from being allocated nonexistent PRBs.
- Primary synchronization codes
Three cells with adjacent azimuths under an eNodeB have different primary

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 164 of 189


synchronization codes. That is, PCI mod 3 of these cells are different.
- Frequency-domain positions of downlink reference signals
If downlink reference signals are transmitted on the same frequency-domain position in neighboring
cells, the quality of these signals is poor when the network load is low. To separate these signals, the
M2000 allocates the most appropriate PCI to the conflicting cell if required engineering parameters are
configured.
- Distance between cells with the same PCI
If the new PCI is the same as the PCI of another cell, the two cells must be as far apart as possible,
with as many eNodeBs as possible between the two cells.
If the conflicting cell is not allocated a new PCI in a self-optimization period, this cell still uses the old
PCI, and the M2000 does not display this PCI as a suggested PCI.

7.2.5 Parameters
Table 7-109: SON – PCI conflict detection / optimization parameters

Huawei Parameter Current GUI Current


Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name Values Values
Update eNB
X2BasedUptENodeBCfgSw
Configuration Via GlobalProcSwitch
itch
X2 Switch
PCI conflict alarm
PciConflictAlmSwitch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
switch
AnrSwitch ANR algorithm
ENodeBAlgoSwitch
switch
ActivePciConflictSwitch ANR Active PCI
Conflict Detection ANR
Switch
StartTime Start time ANR
StopTime Stop time ANR

Note: the ANR table is on eNodeB level, not on cell level.

7.2.6 Parameter details

PCI Conflict Det &


Optim.xlsx

7.2.7 Parameter current network values

Currently not in use.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 165 of 189


8 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC)

8.1 Overview

The LTE system uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) technology in the downlink
(DL) and the Single Carrier - Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) technology in the uplink (UL).
OFDMA and SC-FDMA have a common characteristic: All physical resource blocks (PRBs) occupied by user
equipment (UEs) in a cell are mutually orthogonal in the frequency domain; therefore, intra-cell interference is very
low. However, inter-cell interference is relatively high because the frequency reuse factor is 1, in which case every
cell can provide services over the entire system band. For cell edge users (CEUs), the impact of the inter-cell
interference is especially severe. Therefore, to increase the CEU throughput, inter-cell interference must be
mitigated.
Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) is a technology that collaborates with power control and media access
control (MAC) scheduling technologies to mitigate inter-cell interference. ICIC divides the entire system band into
three frequency bands and uses different frequency bands at the edge of neighboring cells. CEUs, which cause high
interference or may be sensitive to interference, are preferentially scheduled in the cell edge bands to mitigate inter-
cell interference. The interference mitigation enhances the network coverage and improves the CEU throughput.

8.2 Principles

Huawei ICIC classifies cell users into CEUs and cell center users (CCUs).

Figure 8-42: ICIC – Principle - Techniques

The relationships between the key techniques are described as follows:

- CEU/CCU identification is a technique of identifying the UE type (CEU or CCU) based on events A3
and A6. Measurements and configurations for events A3 and A6 in ICIC are independent of those for

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 166 of 189


events A3 and A6 in handovers and other algorithms. Events A3 and A6 in ICIC are referred to as
ICIC events A3 and A6 in this document.
- Edge band mode assignment is a technique of allocating different edge bands to neighboring cells.
Edge band adjustment is a technique of expanding or shrinking the edge band of a cell based on inter-
cell interference and the cell load. Edge band mode assignment and edge band adjustment collaborate
to determine the edge band of each cell.
- Power control and MAC scheduling collaborate to allocate PRBs to UEs based on cell edge bands and
UE types. PRBs in edge bands are mainly allocated to CEUs, and those in center bands are mainly
allocated to CCUs.

8.2.1 CEU/CCU Identification

8.2.1.1 Principles
When initially accessing a network, a UE is recognized as a CCU by the serving cell; after a handover, the UE is
recognized as a CEU by the target cell. After a short period following the initial access or handover, the eNodeB
starts to determine whether the UEs are CEUs or CCUs by using ICIC event A3 or A6, Event A6 is used for carrier
agreegation (CA). CA is not part of this document. ENodeBs identify CEUs and CCUs based on ICIC event A3 or
A6 as follows:

- If an ICIC event A3 or A6 report contains the measurement result only about the serving cell of a UE,
the eNodeB treats the UE as a CCU. An example of this is when the UE moves from the cell edge to
the cell center.
- If an ICIC event A3 or A6 report contains the measurement result about at least one neighboring cell,
the eNodeB treats the UE as a CEU.

The 3GPP TS 36.331 describes principles and triggering mechanisms of ICIC event A3/A6.

Note: measurements and configuration for ICIC event A3 are independent of those for event A3 used in handovers.
Parameter settings for ICIC event A3 have no impact on handovers

8.2.1.2 ICIC Event A3 and Event A6


UEs perform measurements based on parameter settings on eNodeBs and report to the eNodeBs the reference signal
received power (RSRP) of the serving and neighboring cells. This process is ICIC event reporting. It is implemented
in event-triggered periodical reporting mode: After an event is reported for the first time, the measurement results
associated with the event are reported periodically.
The 3GPP TS 36.331, the entering condition and leaving condition for ICIC event A3 are as follows:

Mn + Ofn + Ocn – Hys > Ms +Ofs + Ocs + Off (entering condition)

Mn + Ofn + Ocn + Hys < Ms +Ofs + Ocs + Off (eaving condition)

The variables in the preceding conditions are described as follows (based on RSRP-based event A3):

Mn is the RSRP measurement from the neighbours.


Ms is the RSRP measurement from the serving cell.
Hys is the hysteresis for ICIC event A3. The value for both DL and UL ICIC is determined by the
CellDLIcicMcPara.Hysteresis parameter.
Ofn is the frequency-specific offset for the neighboring cell. It is used in intra-frequency measurements.
Ofs is the frequency-specific offset for the serving cell. It is used in intra-frequency measurements.
Ocn is the cell-specific offset for the neighboring cell.
Ocs is the cell-specific offset for the serving cell.
Off is the offset for ICIC event A3. The values for DL and UL ICIC are determined by the
CellDLIcicMcPara.A3Offset and CellULIcicMcPara.A3Offset parameters, respectively. These parameters are used
to adjust the probability of reporting ICIC event A3.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 167 of 189


For Mn and Ms in the preceding formulas, the triggering quantity can be either RSRP or reference signal received
quality (RSRQ), as determined by the CellDLIcicMcPara.TriggerQuantity parameter for both DL and UL ICIC, and
the reporting quantity is determined by the CellDLIcicMcPara.ReportQuantity parameter for both DL and UL ICIC.
The triggering quantity is used to evaluate event triggering, and the reporting quantity is included in measurement
reports. ICIC event A3 currently uses only RSRP as the triggering quantity and reporting quantity. Do not set these
quantities to RSRQ.
ICIC event A3 is reported only if the entering condition or leaving condition is met for a period, which is called
time-to-trigger. The time-to-trigger prevents the ping-pong effect. Its value for both DL and UL ICIC is determined
by the CellDLIcicMcPara.TimeToTrigger parameter. The contents of ICIC event A3 reports vary as follows:

- If the RSRP measurement result of at least one neighboring cell meets the entering condition for ICIC
event A3, the UE reports the RSRP measurement results of the serving and neighboring cells to the
eNodeB. The maximum number of neighboring cells to be included in a report for both DL and UL
ICIC is determined by the CellDLIcicMcPara.MaxReportCellNum parameter.
- If the RSRP measurement result of at least one neighboring cell meets the leaving condition for ICIC
event A3, the UE reports only the RSRP measurement result of the serving cell to the eNodeB.

Event A3 is reported periodically after the first report. The interval for both DL and UL ICIC is determined by the
CellDLIcicMcPara.ReportInterval parameter. A longer interval indicates a lower frequency of updating user location
information, whereas a shorter interval results in greater consumption of radio interface resources.
The number of periodic reports for both DL and UL ICIC is determined by the CellDLIcicMcPara.ReportAmount
parameter. A larger value results in greater UE power consumption and a larger increase in the CEU throughput. A
smaller value leads to less UE power consumption but lower accuracy of neighboring cell conditions for CEUs. The
low accuracy has a negative impact on the CEU throughput gain.

8.2.2 Edge Band Mode Assignment


Edge band mode assignment is a technique of allocating different edge bands to neighboring cells. There are three
edge band modes: MODE1, MODE2, and MODE3, which represent low-, medium-, and high-frequency bands,
respectively. The bandwidth of each band is about 1/3 of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) or
physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) bandwidth. The PRBs available to CEUs in a cell using a specific edge
band mode correlate with the ICIC policy and system bandwidth. The policy can be either dynamic ICIC or static
ICIC.
If there are three cells per eNodeB, as in the figure here below, neighboring cells use different edge band modes so
that CEUs in the cells are served by different frequency bands in the system band.
Theoretically, the use of three edge band modes can eliminate inter-cell interference in the frequency domain.

As shown here below, the yellow, green, and purple colors represent different edge band modes. For example, if the
system bandwidth is 20 MHz, the edge band of each cell may occupy 1/3 of the entire system band.

The CellDlIcic.BandMode and CellUlIcic.BandMode parameters specify the edge band mode used in DL ICIC and
UL ICIC, respectively. eNodeBs determine the range of the edge band for each cell based on the cell bandwidth and
edge band mode.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 168 of 189


Figure 8-43: ICIC – Edge Band Modes for tri-sector site (eNodeB)

8.2.3 Edge Band Adjustment


There are two ICIC policies: static ICIC and dynamic ICIC. Only dynamic ICIC adjusts edge bands.
If edge loads are unbalanced between neighboring cells in the processing of data services, the cells need to
dynamically adjust their edge bands based on the interference and edge loads to achieve better ICIC effects. This
technique is called edge band adjustment in dynamic ICIC.
Edge band adjustment in dynamic ICIC applies to a cell and its interfering cells. The interfering cells are the
neighboring cells included in ICIC event A3 reports. eNodeBs periodically check whether the edge band expansion
and shrinking conditions are met. If the conditions are not met, edge band distribution is relatively balanced and
therefore the edge bands do not need to be adjusted. The expansion and shrinking conditions are as follows:

- Edge band expansion condition


The current cell expands its edge band if its edge band is heavily loaded while the edge bands in its
neighboring cells are lightly loaded. The Edge Band Adjustment here below is used as an example to
describe edge load evaluation: Yellow grids for the current cell represent the PRBs defined in static
ICIC, and green grids with Y denote the PRBs that CEUs in the current cell actually use beyond the
edge band defined in static ICIC. In this situation, the current cell determines that the number of PRBs
required by CEUs is greater than the number of cell edge PRBs defined in static ICIC. The edge load
of the current cell is high while the edge load of the neighboring cell is low.

- Edge band shrinking condition

 Active shrinking: The current cell actively shrinks its edge band if its edge load isrelatively
low.
 Passive shrinking: When the neighboring cell expands its actual edge band within the edge
band defined in static ICIC, the current cell shrinks its edge band if the PRBs used by the
current and neighboring cells collide. The figure here below shows an example of passive
shrinking.

DL inter-cell interference and UL inter-cell interference are caused by eNodeBs and UEs, respectively. However,
CEUs are interfered in both DL and UL. Therefore, the preceding ICIC principles apply both in the DL and the UL.
However, there are differences between DL ICIC and UL ICIC in the internal processing of eNodeBs.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 169 of 189


Figure 8-44: ICIC – Edge Band Adjustment example

8.3 Parameters

Table 8-110: ICIC - Parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
Downlink ICIC
ReportInterval measurement report CellDLIcicMcPara
interval
Downlink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
MaxReportCellNum measurement max
report cell number
ReportAmount DownLink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
measurement report
amount
ReportQuantity DownLink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
measurement report
quantity
TriggerQuantity DownLink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
measurement
trigger quantity
Hysteresis DownLink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
measurement
hysteresis
TimeToTrigger DownLink ICIC CellDLIcicMcPara
measurement time
to trigger
A3Offset Downlink ICIC A3 CellDLIcicMcPara
offset
A6Offset Downlink ICIC A6 CellDLIcicMcPara
offset
BandMode Downlink band CellDlIcic
division scheme
DlIcicUserAttrGfactorThd User Attribution CellDlIcic
Gfactor Threshold
DlIcicNoiseUserRsrpThd Noise User RSRP CellDlIcic
Threshold
ReportInterval Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 170 of 189


measurement report
interval
Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
MaxReportCellNum measurement max
report cell number
ReportAmount Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
measurement report
amount
ReportQuantity Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
measurement report
quantity
TriggerQuantity Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
measurement
trigger quantity
Hysteresis Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
measurement
hysteresis
TimeToTrigger Uplink ICIC CellULIcicMcPara
measurement time
to trigger
A3Offset Uplink ICIC A3 CellULIcicMcPara
offset
BandMode Uplink band CellUlIcic
division scheme

Table 8-111: ICIC – Parameters current values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
Downlink ICIC measurement
ReportInterval 5120ms 5120ms 5120ms 5120ms
report interval
Downlink ICIC measurement
MaxReportCellNum 8 8 8 8
max report cell number
ReportAmount DownLink ICIC measurement
Infinity Infinity Infinity Infinity
report amount
ReportQuantity DownLink ICIC measurement Same_As_Tr Same_As_
Both Both
report quantity ig-Quan Trig-Quan
TriggerQuantity DownLink ICIC measurement
RSRP RSRP RSRP RSRP
trigger quantity
Hysteresis DownLink ICIC measurement
4 4 4 4
hysteresis
TimeToTrigger DownLink ICIC measurement
640ms 640ms 640ms 640ms
time to trigger
A3Offset -13 (- -10 (-
Downlink ICIC A3 offset -13 (-26dB) -10 (-20dB)
26dB) 20dB)
A6Offset Downlink ICIC A6 offset
BandMode Downlink band division scheme INVALID MODE1 INVALID MODE1
DlIcicUserAttrGfacto User Attribution Gfactor
rThd Threshold
DlIcicNoiseUserRsrp
Noise User RSRP Threshold
Thd

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 171 of 189


Uplink ICIC measurement report
ReportInterval 5120ms 5120ms 5120ms 5120ms
interval
Uplink ICIC measurement max
MaxReportCellNum 8 8 8 8
report cell number
ReportAmount Uplink ICIC measurement report
Infinity Infinity Infinity Infinity
amount
ReportQuantity Uplink ICIC measurement report Same_As_Tr Same_As_T Same_As_ Same_As_
quantity ig-Quan rig-Quan Trig-Quan Trig-Quan
TriggerQuantity Uplink ICIC measurement
RSRP RSRP RSRP RSRP
trigger quantity
Hysteresis Uplink ICIC measurement
4 4 4 4
hysteresis
TimeToTrigger Uplink ICIC measurement time
640ms 640ms 640ms 640ms
to trigger
A3Offset -10 (- -10 (-
Uplink ICIC A3 offset -10 (-20dB) -10 (-20dB)
20dB) 20dB)
BandMode Uplink band division scheme INVALID MODE1 INVALID MODE1

Notes:
- the parameters in italic are from eRAN6, as eRAN3 is currently running, there are no values;
- this feature is currently not in use, so the current parameter setting is not taken into account.

8.4 Parameter details

ICIC parameter
details 1.xlsx

8.5 Downlink Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (DL ICIC)

DL ICIC consists of the following features:

- LBFD-00202201 Downlink Static Inter-Cell Interference Coordination;


- LOFD-00101401 Downlink Dynamic Inter-Cell Interference Coordination.

8.5.1 Static DL ICIC


To enable static DL ICIC for an eNodeB, set the eNodeB-level parameter ENodeBAlgoSwitch.DlIcicSwitch to
DlIcicStaticSwitch_ON_ENUM.
For details about the key techniques used by static DL ICIC, see 3.1 CEU/CCU Identification and Edge Band Mode
Assignment.

8.5.2 Dynamic DL ICIC


To enable dynamic DL ICIC for an eNodeB, set the eNodeB-level parameter ENodeBAlgoSwitch.DlIcicSwitch to
DlIcicDynamicSwitch_ON_ENUM.
For details about the key techniques used by dynamic DL ICIC, see CEU/CCU Identification and Edge Band
Adjustment.

If dynamic DL ICIC is enabled, the eNodeB allocates an initial DL edge band to each cell based on the cell
bandwidth and edge band mode. Then, the eNodeB periodically triggers adjustments of the DL edge band. The
following describes how dynamic DL ICIC adjusts edge bands.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 172 of 189


Dynamic DL ICIC adjusts DL edge bands for cells based on the interference and load information exchanged
between the cells. Intra-eNodeB neighboring cells exchange this information through internal interfaces. Inter-
eNodeB neighboring cells exchange this information by Huawei defined messages. A Huawei-defined message
includes the following information:

- ID of the source cell: This is the ID of the cell that sends this message;
- ID of the target cell: This is the ID of the neighboring cell to which this message is sent;
- Coordination request indication: This indicates whether the source cell requests the target cell to adjust
its edge band. The source cell sets the coordination request indication to TRUE if the interference from
the target cell is intolerable. The tolerance is evaluated based on the measured RSRP values and DL
edge bands of the source cell and target cell.
- Load status of the source cell: This is determined based on the average number of edge PRBs required
by CEUs during historical adjustment periods and the number of PRBs in the current edge band. Based
on the load status, the target cell decides whether to adjust its edge band.
- Edge band status of the source cell: This is indicated by the bitmap of all high-power PRBs in the
source cell. Based on this bitmap, the target cell can avoid using the edge band of the source cell and
perform inter-cell coordination effectively. For details about the highpower PRBs, see the descriptions
of relative narrowband TX power (RNTP) in the 3GPP TS 36.213.

If the edge band of a cell is adjusted or the edge load is changed, this cell notifies its neighboring cells of this
adjustment or change by Huawei-defined messages. Based on the information contained in these messages, the
neighboring cells expand or shrink their edge band. The expansion and shrinking policies are as follows:

- Expansion policy: A cell attempts to expand its edge band towards a neighboring cell with a lower
edge load. This expansion is canceled if the estimated post-expansion edge band exceeds the edge-
band range defined in static ICIC and the extra PRBs collide with the edge band used by the
neighboring cell.
- Shrinking policy: A cell attempts to shrink its edge band to the average number of edge PRBs in this
cell during historical adjustment periods. If the estimated post-shrinking edge band exceeds the edge-
band range defined in static ICIC and the extra PRBs still collide with the edge band used by a
neighboring cell, the colliding PRBs are removed from the edge band of the current cell.

8.5.3 Parameters

Table 8-112: ICIC – DL ICIC Parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
DlIcic algorithm
DlIcicSwitch ENodeBAlgoSwitch
switch

Table 8-113: ICIC – DL ICIC Parameters network current value

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
DlIcicSwitch DlIcicSwitc DlIcicSwit DlIcicSwit
DlIcicSwitch DlIcic algorithm switch _OFF_ENU h_OFF_EN ch_OFF_E ch_OFF_E
M UM NUM NUM

Note: this parameter is on eNodeB level, not on cell level.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 173 of 189


8.5.4 Parameter details

DL ICIC eNodeB.xlsx

8.6 Uplink Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (UL ICIC)

UL ICIC consists of the following features:

- LBFD-00202202 Uplink Static Inter-Cell Interference Coordination


- LOFD-00101402 Uplink Dynamic Inter-Cell Interference Coordination

The preceding features address only frequency-domain UL ICIC.

8.6.1 Static UL ICIC


To enable static UL ICIC for an eNodeB, set the eNodeB-level parameter ENodeBAlgoSwitch.UlIcicFreqSwitch to
STATIC.
For details about the key techniques used by static UL ICIC, refer CEU/CCU Identification and Edge Band Mode
Assignment.

8.6.2 Dynamic UL ICIC


To enable dynamic UL ICIC for an eNodeB, set the eNodeB-level parameter ENodeBAlgoSwitch.UlIcicFreqSwitch
to DYNAMIC.
For details about the key techniques used by dynamic UL ICIC, refer to CEU/CCU Identification and Edge Band
Adjustment.
If dynamic UL ICIC is enabled, the eNodeB allocates an initial UL edge band to each cell based on the cell
bandwidth and edge band mode. Then, the eNodeB periodically triggers adjustments of the UL edge band. The
following describes how dynamic UL ICIC adjusts edge bands.
Dynamic UL ICIC adjusts edge bands for cells based on the edge band modes and the high interference indication
(HII) messages exchanged between the cells. Intra-eNodeB neighboring cells exchange HII messages through
internal interfaces. Inter-eNodeB neighboring cells exchange HII messages through X2 interfaces. An HII message
defined in the 3GPP TS 36.423 contains the following information:

- ID of the source cell: This is the ID of the cell that sends this message.
- ID of the target cell: This is the ID of the neighboring cell to which this message is sent.
- Interference information: This is indicated by the bitmap of all edge PRBs in the source cell. Based on
this bitmap, the target cell adjusts its edge band.

The eNodeB periodically measures the number of PRBs actually used by CEUs in each cell and compares this
number with the number of PRBs in the current edge band of the cell. If the difference between the numbers is
excessively large for a cell, the eNodeB triggers an edge band adjustment. If the edge band of the cell is adjusted,
the cell transmits the updated HII messages to its neighboring cells.

Based on the information in the HII messages from a cell, its neighboring cells expand or shrink their edge band.
The expansion and shrinking policies are as follows:

- Expansion policy: A cell attempts to expand its edge band to the average number of edge PRBs in this
cell during historical adjustment periods. If the estimated post-expansion edge band exceeds the edge-
band range defined in static ICIC and the extra PRBs collide with the edge band used by a neighboring
cell, the colliding PRBs are removed from the edge band of the current cell.
- Shrinking policy: A cell attempts to shrink its edge band to the average number of edge PRBs in this
cell during historical adjustment periods. In the passive-shrinking situation, ICIC and the extra PRBs

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 174 of 189


collide with the edge band used by a neighboring cell, the colliding PRBs are removed from the edge
band of the current cell.

8.6.3 Parameters

Table 8-114: ICIC – UL ICIC Parameters

Huawei Parameter
Huawei Parameter ID Table
Name
UlIcicFreqSwitch UlIcic freq switch ENodeBAlgoSwitch

Table 8-115: ICIC – UL ICIC Parameters network current value

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
UlIcicFreqSwitch UlIcic freq switch OFF OFF OFF OFF

Note: this parameter is on eNodeB level, not on cell level.

8.6.4 Parameter details

UL ICIC eNodeB.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 175 of 189


9 Uplink Coordinated Multi Points (UL CoMP)

9.1 Overview

UL CoMP uses UL macro diversity to combine received signals. In the coverage area of an eNodeB, UL CoMP uses
the antennas of two neighboring cells to receive UE signals from the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and
combines these received signals. In this way, UL CoMP provides signal combining gains and interference mitigation
gains. UL CoMP depends on UL interference rejection combining (IRC) and can be used only after LOFD-001012
UL Interference Rejection Combining is enabled. The UL CoMP can be used in the following scenarios.

9.2 Scenarios

9.2.1 Scenario 1

A UE's signals are expected to obtain signal combining gains from UL CoMP. For simplicity, such a UE is called a
type-1 CoMP UE.
A type-1 CoMP UE (see figure here below) lies on the edge between cells (bi-sector area). The signal of this UE are
very likely be a combination of both cell 1 and cell 0, and so gains from UL CoMP.
If a type-1 CoMP UE experiences interference from other UEs in neighboring cells, the type-1 CoMP UE's signals
can also obtain interference mitigation gains.

Figure 9-45: UL CoMP – Scenario 1

9.2.2 Scenario 2

A UE's signals are expected to obtain interference mitigation gains from UL CoMP. For simplicity, such a UE is
called a type-2 CoMP UE.
A type-2 CoMP UE (see in figure here below) experiences interference from a UE (UE1) on the edge in the area of
the bisector. The signals of UE0 can obtain obvious interference mitigation gains from UL CoMP. Note that UE0
does not lie on the edge between intra-site cells.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 176 of 189


Figure 9-46: UL CoMP – Scenario 2

Notes:
If a UE meets the requirements for both type-1 and type-2 CoMP UEs, the eNodeB still categorizes the
UE as a type-1 CoMP UE.
The serving cell and the coordinating cell must be established on the same baseband processing unit (BBP)
in scenarios 1 and 2 for LOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP.

9.3 Benefits

UL CoMP uses the antennas of two cells to receive a suitable UE's signals. If each cell has two receive (RX)
antennas, UL CoMP can use four RX antennas to provide gains, compared with two RX antennas in non-CoMP
scenarios.

9.3.1 Performance Gains


Multiple-antenna reception provides signal combining gains (including diversity gains and array gains) and
interference mitigation gains. Generally, the achieved gain increases with the number of RX antennas. For details
about different types of gain.
UL CoMP provides different performance gains for different types of CoMP UEs:

- UL CoMP provides signal combining gains and interference mitigation gains for type-1 CoMP Ues;
- UL CoMP provides interference mitigation gains for type-2 CoMP UEs.

UL CoMP uses IRC (Interference Rejection Combining) to provide interference mitigation gains. UL CoMP can
mitigate interference from detected sources to UEs on the edge between cells (for example, in scenario 1). UL
CoMP can also mitigate interference from undetected sources to UEs on the edge between cells (for example, in
scenarios 1 and 2).

9.3.2 Capacity Gains


UL CoMP increases the UL throughput of cell edge users (CEUs) because type-1 CoMP Ues are located on the edge
between cells. UL CoMP also increases the average UL throughput of a cell because type-2 CoMP UEs can be
located in the cell center or on the edge between cells.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 177 of 189


9.4 Basic UL CoMP Process

The basic UL CoMP process consists of three procedures, as shown in the figure here below:

Figure 9-47: UL-CoMP - Basic Process

The basic process is described as follows:

- Enable UL CoMP.
Turn on the UL CoMP switches, and configure cell-level information such as information about
candidate coordinating cells.
- The eNodeB selects CoMP UEs and coordinating cells.
The eNodeB selects CoMP UEs and coordinating cells based on the event A3 measurement
reports from UEs and the RBs allocated to the CoMP UEs.
- The eNodeB uses antennas of multiple cells for joint reception.
The physical layer uses the antennas of each CoMP UE's serving cell and coordinating cell to receive
this UE's signals and then combines these signals using maximum ratio combining (MRC) or IRC. IRC
is used if the license for LOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection Combining is purchased and
activated.

9.5 Selecting CoMP UEs and Coordinating Cells

9.5.1 Selecting a CoMP UE


The figure here below illustrates the differences in reference signal received power (RSRP) between the cells of an
eNodeB to help understand the selection of CoMP UEs.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 178 of 189


Figure 9-48: UL CoMP – Tri-sector site RSRP

In the figure above, the coordinates (0, 0) represent the eNodeB location, the horizontal and vertical axes represent
the distances of UEs from the eNodeB (unit: m), and the colors indicate RSRP differences (unit: dB). The RSRP
difference at any point is calculated as follows:

RSRP difference (dB) = RSRP received in the serving cell (dBm) – RSRP received from the neighboring cell (dBm)

The color ribbon to the right of the figure shows the mapping between RSRP differences and colors. For example,
the deep blue at the bottom represents an RSRP difference of 0 dB.
UEs in the blue area can be selected as type-1 CoMP UEs. UEs in the red and yellow areas can be selected as type-2
CoMP UEs if the UEs experience interference from type-1 CoMP UEs in the blue area.

9.5.2 Selecting a Type-1 CoMP UE and a Coordinating Cell

After UL CoMP is activated:


- A UE who has neighboring cells meet the triggering condition for UL CoMP event A3sends event A3
measurement reports to the eNodeB.
- The eNodeB selects a cell as a coordinating cell if the RSRP received from this cell is the highest
among the intra-frequency cells indicated in the reports.
- The eNodeB selects the UE as a type-1 CoMP UE.
- When any neighboring cell meets the leaving condition for UL CoMP event A3, the UE sends event
A3 leaving reports to the eNodeB. If all cells indicated in the reports cannot be selected as the
coordinating cell of the cell serving the UE, the eNodeB considers that the UE exits UL CoMP.

Note:
All parameters for UL CoMP event A3 except the A3 offset (CellUlCompAlgo.UlCompA3Offset) are the same as
those for inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC).

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 179 of 189


Exception:
UL CoMP produces a significant gain right after a coverage-based intra-frequency handover of a UE to an intra-
BBP cell. In this case, the eNodeB selects this UE as a type-1 CoMP UE and the source cell as a coordinating cell.

9.5.3 Selecting a Type-2 CoMP UE and a Coordinating Cell


After type-1 CoMP UEs are determined, intra-BBP cells exchange information about RBs occupied by these UEs. If
a UE in the current cell shares some RBs with a type-1 CoMP UE in an intra-LBBP cell, the eNodeB selects the UE
in the current cell as a type-2 CoMP UE and the intra-BBP cell as a coordinating cell.

9.6 Using Antennas of Multiple Cells for Joint Reception

After the physical layer receives the information about CoMP UEs and their coordinating cells, it uses the antennas
of the serving cell and coordinating cell to implement joint reception.
Compared with common multiple-antenna reception, joint reception by antennas of multiple
cells has the following characteristics:

- Reuses antennas and radio frequency (RF) channels;


- Provides a high gain when the signals of a CoMP UE and its interfering UEs can be received by the
antennas of the serving cell and coordinating cell and when their power difference is small. For details
about common multiple-antenna reception, The recommended algorithm is joint interference rejection
combining (JIRC). This algorithm treats the antennas of the coordinating cell as the antennas of the
serving cell. The principles of JIRC are the same as those of IRC.
- UL CoMP provides interference mitigation gains only after LOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection
Combining is purchased and enabled.
- If IRC is not available, UL CoMP can use only MRC. In this case, UL CoMP cannot provide
interference mitigation gains. Strong interference from/in the coordinating cell cannot be mitigated,
and therefore the signal combining gain produced for type-1 CoMP UE signals may also drop.

9.7 Parameters

9.7.1 Parameters

Table 9-116: UL-CoMP - parameter

Huawei Parameter ID Huawei Parameter Name Table


UlCompSwitch UlCoMP algorithms switch CellAlgoSwitch
MrcIrcAdptSwitch MRC/IRC adaptation switch CellAlgoSwitch
UlCompA3Offset UlCompA3Offset CellUlCompAlgo

9.7.2 Parameters current values

Table 9-117: UL-CoMP – parameter values

Huawei Parameter Single Dual


Huawei Parameter Name
ID
L800 L1800 L800 L1800
UlCompSwitch UlCoMP algorithms switch ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
MrcIrcAdptSwitch MRC/IRC adaptation switch ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
UlCompA3Offset UlCompA3Offset

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 180 of 189


The parameter UlCompA3Offset is an eRAN6 parameter, so there are no actual value.

Parameter details:

ULCoMP.xlsx

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 181 of 189


10 Appendices

10.1 Appendix 1: Cell Selection and Cell Reselection

10.1.1 Cell Selection and Cell Reselection states and procedures

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.304 RRC Idle cell selection and reselection states and procedures.

Figure 10-49: 3Gpp TS 36.304 RRC Idle cell selection and reselection states and procedures

go here whenever a
new PLMN is
selected

cell information no cell information


stored for the PLMN 1 stored for the PLMN

Stored Initial
information no suitable cell found Cell Selection
Cell Selection

no suitable
cell found suitable cell found 2 suitable cell found
no suitable
cell found
Cell Selection NAS indicates that
when leaving suitable Camped registration on selected
connected cell found normally PLMN is rejected
mode (except with cause
#12, #14 , #15 or #25
[5][16])
return to leave trigger
idle mode idle mode suitable
cell found

Connected Cell
mode no suitable
Reselection
Evaluation cell found
Process
go here
when no
USIM in
the UE
Any Cell
no acceptable cell found Selection

USIM inserted

acceptable
cell found
1

Cell Selection
acceptable
when leaving Camped on suitable
cell found
connected any cell cell found 2
mode

return to leave trigger


idle mode idle mode acceptable
cell found

Connected
mode Cell
(Emergency Reselection no acceptable
calls only) Evaluation cell found
Process

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 182 of 189


10.1.2 System Information Block

10.1.2.1 System information Block 1

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 1 description (Rel. 9)

Table 10-118: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 1 description

SystemInformationBlockType1 field descriptions


multiBandInfoList
A list of additional frequency band indicators as defined in TS 36.101 [42, table 5.5-1] that the cell belongs to. If the
UE supports the frequency band in the freqBandIndicator IE it shall apply that frequency band. Otherwise, the UE
shall apply the first listed band which it supports in the multiBandInfoList IE. If E-UTRAN includes multiBandInfoList-
v9e0 it includes the same number of entries, and listed in the same order, as in multiBandInfoList (i.e. without suffix).
plmn-IdentityList
List of PLMN identities. The first listed PLMN-Identity is the primary PLMN.
cellReservedForOperatorUse
As defined in TS 36.304 [4].
trackingAreaCode
A trackingAreaCode that is common for all the PLMNs listed.
cellBarred
‘barred’ means the cell is barred, as defined in TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqReselection
Used to control cell reselection to intra-frequency cells when the highest ranked cell is barred, or treated as barred by
the UE, as specified in TS 36.304 [4].
csg-Indication
If set to TRUE the UE is only allowed to access the cell if it is a CSG member cell or if selected during manual CSG
selection, see TS 36.304 [4].
q-RxLevMinOffset
Parameter Qrxlevminoffset in TS 36.304 [4]. Actual value Qrxlevminoffset = IE value * 2 [dB]. If absent, the UE applies the
(default) value of 0 dB for Qrxlevminoffset. Affects the minimum required Rx level in the cell.
p-Max
Value applicable for the cell. If absent the UE applies the maximum power according to the UE capability.
si-Periodicity
Periodicity of the SI-message in radio frames, such that rf8 denotes 8 radio frames, rf16 denotes 16 radio frames, and
so on.
sib-MappingInfo
List of the SIBs mapped to this SystemInformation message.There is no mapping information of SIB2; it is always
present in the first SystemInformation message listed in the schedulingInfoList list.
si-WindowLength
Common SI scheduling window for all SIs. Unit in milliseconds, where ms1 denotes 1 millisecond, ms2 denotes 2
milliseconds and so on.
systemInfoValueTag
Common for all SIBs other than MIB, SIB1, SIB10, SIB11 and SIB12. Change of MIB and SIB1 is detected by
acquisition of the corresponding message.
csg-Identity
Identity of the Closed Subscriber Group the cell belongs to. The field is present in a CSG cell.
ims-EmergencySupport
Indicates whether the cell supports IMS emergency bearer services for UEs in limited service mode. If absent, IMS
emergency call is not supported by the network in the cell for UEs in limited service mode.
q-QualMin
Parameter “Qqualmin” in TS 36.304 [4]. If cellSelectionInfo-v920 is not present, the UE applies the (default) value of
negative infinity for Qqualmin.
q-QualMinOffset
Parameter “Qqualminoffset” in TS 36.304 [4]. Actual value Qqualminoffset = IE value [dB]. If cellSelectionInfo-v920 is not present
or the field is not present, the UE applies the (default) value of 0 dB for Qqualminoffset. Affects the minimum required
quality level in the cell.

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 183 of 189


10.1.2.2 System information Block 3

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 3 description (Rel. 9)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 184 of 189


Table 10-119: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 3 description

SystemInformationBlockType3 field descriptions


cellReselectionInfoCommon
Cell re-selection information common for cells.
q-Hyst
Parameter Qhyst in 36.304 [4], Value in dB. Value dB1 corresponds to 1 dB, dB2 corresponds to 2 dB and so on.
speedStateReselectionPars
Speed dependent reselection parameters, see TS 36.304 [4]. If this field is absent, i.e., mobilityStateParameters is
also not present, UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
q-HystSF
Parameter “Speed dependent ScalingFactor for Qhyst” in TS 36.304 [4]. The sf-Medium and sf-High concern the
additional hysteresis to be applied, in Medium and High Mobility state respectively, to Qhyst as defined in TS 36.304 [4].
In dB. Value dB-6 corresponds to -6dB, dB-4 corresponds to -4dB and so on.
t-ReselectionEUTRA
Parameter “TreselectionEUTRA” in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF
Parameter “Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRA” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE
behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
q-RxLevMin
Parameter “Qrxlevmin” in TS 36.304 [4], applicable for intra-frequency neighbour cells.
s-IntraSearch
Parameter “SIntraSearchP” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field s-IntraSearchP is present, the UE applies the value of s-
IntraSearchP instead. Otherwise if neither s-IntraSearch nor s-IntraSearchP is present, the UE applies the (default)
value of infinity for SIntraSearchP.
cellReselectionServingFreqInfo
Information common for Cell re-selection to inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells.
s-NonIntraSearch
Parameter “SnonIntraSearchP” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field s-NonIntraSearchP is present, the UE applies the value of s-
NonIntraSearchP instead. Otherwise if neither s-NonIntraSearch nor s-NonIntraSearchP is present, the UE applies the
(default) value of infinity for SnonIntraSearchP.
threshServingLow
Parameter “ThreshServing, LowP” in TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqcellReselectionInfo
Cell re-selection information common for intra-frequency cells.
p-Max
Value applicable for the intra-frequency neighbouring E-UTRA cells. If absent the UE applies the maximum power
according to the UE capability.
allowedMeasBandwidth
If absent, the value corresponding to the downlink bandwidth indicated by the dl-Bandwidth included in
MasterInformationBlock applies.
s-IntraSearchP
Parameter “SIntraSearchP” in TS 36.304 [4]. See descriptions under s-IntraSearch.
s-IntraSearchQ
Parameter “SIntraSearchQ” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE applies the (default) value of 0 dB for
SIntraSearchQ.
s-NonIntraSearchP
Parameter “SnonIntraSearchP” in TS 36.304 [4]. See descriptions under s-NonIntraSearch.
s-NonIntraSearchQ
Parameter “SnonIntraSearchQ” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE applies the (default) value of 0 dB for
SnonIntraSearchQ.
q-QualMin
Parameter “Qqualmin” in TS 36.304 [4], applicable for intra-frequency neighrbour cells. If the field is not present, the UE
applies the (default) value of negative infinity for Qqualmin.
threshServingLowQ
Parameter “ThreshServing, LowQ” in TS 36.304 [4].

10.1.2.3 System information Block 4

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 185 of 189


Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 4 description (Rel. 9)

Table 10-120: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 4 description

SystemInformationBlockType4 field descriptions


intraFreqNeighbCellList
List of intra-frequency neighbouring cells with specific cell re-selection parameters.
q-OffsetCell
Parameter “Qoffsets,n” in TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqBlackCellList
List of blacklisted intra-frequency neighbouring cells.
csg-PhysCellIdRange
Set of physical cell identities reserved for CSG cells on the frequency on which this field was received. The received
csg-PhysCellIdRange applies if less than 24 hours has elapsed since it was received and it was received in the same
primary PLMN. The 3 hour validity restriction (section 5.2.1.3) does not apply to this field.

10.1.2.4 System information Block 5

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 5 description (Rel. 9)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 186 of 189


Table 10-121: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 5 description

SystemInformationBlockType5 field descriptions


multiBandInfoList
Indicates the list of frequency bands in addition to the band represented by dl-CarrierFreq for which cell reselection
parameters are common. E-UTRAN indicates at most maxMultiBands frequency bands (i.e. the total number of entries
across both multiBandInfoList and multiBandInfoList-v9e0 is below this limit).
p-Max
Value applicable for the neighbouring E-UTRA cells on this carrier frequency. If absent the UE applies the maximum
power according to the UE capability.
threshX-High
Parameter “ThreshX, HighP” in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
Parameter “ThreshX, LowP” in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA
Parameter “TreselectionEUTRA” in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF
Parameter “Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRA” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE
behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
q-OffsetFreq
Parameter “Qoffsetfrequency” in TS 36.304 [4].
interFreqNeighCellList
List of inter-frequency neighbouring cells with specific cell re-selection parameters.
q-OffsetCell
Parameter “Qoffsets,n” in TS 36.304 [4].
interFreqBlackCellList
List of blacklisted inter-frequency neighbouring cells.
interFreqCarrierFreqList
List of neighbouring inter-frequencies. E-UTRAN does not configure more than one entry for the same physical
frequency regardless of the E-ARFCN used to indicate this. If E-UTRAN includes interFreqCarrierFreqList-v8h0 and/
or interFreqCarrierFreqList-v9e0 it includes the same number of entries, and listed in the same order, as in
interFreqCarrierFreqList (i.e. without suffix).
q-QualMin
Parameter “Qqualmin” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE applies the (default) value of negative infinity for
Qqualmin.
threshX-HighQ
Parameter “ThreshX, HighQ” in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-LowQ
Parameter “ThreshX, LowQ” in TS 36.304 [4].

10.1.2.5 System information Block 6

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 6 description (Rel. 9)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 187 of 189


Table 10-122: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 6 description

SystemInformationBlockType6 field descriptions


t-ReselectionUTRA
Parameter “TreselectionUTRAN” in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionUTRA-SF
Parameter “Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionUTRA” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE
behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
carrierFreqListUTRA-FDD-v8h0
One entry corresponding to each supported UTRA FDD carrier frequency listed in the same order as in
carrierFreqListUTRA-FDD.
carrierFreqListUTRA-FDD
List of carrier frequencies of UTRA FDD. E-UTRAN does not configure more than one entry for the same physical
frequency regardless of the ARFCN used to indicate this.
carrierFreqListUTRA-TDD
List of carrier frequencies of UTRA TDD. E-UTRAN does not configure more than one entry for the same physical
frequency regardless of the ARFCN used to indicate this.
multiBandInfoList
Indicates the list of frequency bands in addition to the band represented by carrierFreq in the CarrierFreqUTRA-FDD
for which UTRA cell reselection parameters are common
threshX-High
Parameter “ThreshX, HighP” in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
Parameter “ThreshX, LowP” in TS 36.304 [4].
q-RxLevMin
Parameter “Qrxlevmin” in TS 25.304 [40]. Actual value = IE value * 2+1 [dBm].
p-MaxUTRA
The maximum allowed transmission power on the (uplink) carrier frequency, see TS 25.304 [40]. In dBm
q-QualMin
Parameter “Qqualmin” in TS 25.304 [40]. Actual value = IE value [dB].
threshX-HighQ
Parameter “ThreshX, HighQ” in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-LowQ
Parameter “ThreshX, LowQ” in TS 36.304 [4].

10.1.2.6 System information Block 7

Here below, the 3Gpp TS 36.331 RRC System information Block 7 description (Rel. 9)

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 188 of 189


Table 10-123: 3Gpp TS 36.331 System information block 7 description

SystemInformationBlockType7 field descriptions


carrierFreqsInfoList
Provides a list of neighbouring GERAN carrier frequencies, which may be monitored for neighbouring GERAN cells.
The GERAN carrier frequencies are organised in groups and the cell reselection parameters are provided per group of
GERAN carrier frequencies.
carrierFreqs
The list of GERAN carrier frequencies organised into one group of GERAN carrier frequencies.
commonInfo
Defines the set of cell reselection parameters for the group of GERAN carrier frequencies.
t-ReselectionGERAN
Parameter “TreselectionGERAN” in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionGERAN-SF
Parameter “Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionGERAN” in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE
behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
ncc-Permitted
Field encoded as a bit map, where bit N is set to "0" if a BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is not permitted for monitoring
and set to "1" if the BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is permitted for monitoring; N = 1 to 8; bit 1 of the bitmap is the
leading bit of the bit string.
q-RxLevMin
Parameter “Qrxlevmin” in TS 36.304 [1], minimum required RX level in the GSM cell. The actual value of Qrxlevmin in dBm =
(IE value * 2)  115.
p-MaxGERAN
Maximum allowed transmission power for GERAN on an uplink carrier frequency, see TS 45.008 [28]. Value in dBm.
Applicable for the neighbouring GERAN cells on this carrier frequency. If pmaxGERAN is absent, the maximum power
according to the UE capability is used.
threshX-High
Parameter “ThreshX, HighP” in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
Parameter “ThreshX, LowP” in TS 36.304 [4].

No spreading without Permission of Huawei and Mobistar Page 189 of 189

You might also like